AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Repair Manual
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Edition 03.2016
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
un
le
Service
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Service Department. Technical Information
Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups
Repair Group
27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
90 - Instruments
92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
96 - Interior Lights, Switches
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
97 - Wiring
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
All rights reserved.
No reproduction without prior agreement from publisher.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Copyright © 2016 Volkswagen AG, Wolfsburg
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
D3E800231C7
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Contents
27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings and Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Post/Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery, Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery, Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconnecting Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B+ Cable Mount on Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. Volkswage
Adaptive Cruise Control System
gen.A.G. . . . . . . .n.A.G.d.oe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sn
swa
k
l
o
Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator
V Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ot.g.u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
by
a
d
se
Pyrotechnic BatteryoriIsolator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r.a.nt.e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eo
h
t
Automatic Distance
au Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r.a.c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
s
s
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosis and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter B , Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbed Belt, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor G550 , Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Distance Regulation, Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Disconnecting Sequence, Vehicles with Electric Closing Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery in Right Side of Luggage Compartment, Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery in Right Side of Luggage Compartment, Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment, Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment, Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery in Right Side of Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Cut-Out Relay J7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pyrotechnic Battery Cut-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Battery Temperature Sensor G331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbed Belt Pulley on Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adaptive Cruise Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Booster Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
5
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
13
13
13
14
15
15
16
18
18
19
19
20
23
26
28
29
30
31
33
36
37
39
40
42
44
90 - Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
46
i
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
4
4.1
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Interval Display, Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Lamp Symbols in Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Side of Instrument Cluster Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster Connector Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosis and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster, Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
46
47
47
48
49
51
51
51
52
52
92 - Wiper/Washer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hoses, Repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades, Adjusting Park Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Washer System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosis and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor G397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spray Jets for Front Windshield Washer System, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volkswa
Spray Nozzles, Checking and Adjusting . .sw
. a. g.e.n .AG
. .. . . . . . g.e.n A. G
. .do.e.s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
k
not
l
o
V
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . .e.d b. y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g.u.ar.a . . . . . . . . . . . .
n
is
Windshield Wiper System . . . . t.ho.r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .te.e .o . . . . . . . . .
u
r
a
Joint-Free Wiper Blades . . . s.s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ac. . . . . . . .
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor G397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Filler Neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor G33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spray Nozzles for Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Washer Pump V11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spray Jet Telescoping Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spray Nozzle Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
54
55
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
60
61
62
62
62
62
63
63
70
71
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
79
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
5
94 - Exterior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Contents
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
ii
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
1.8
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Swivel Module Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Daytime Running Lamp and Parking Lamp LED Module
......................................................................
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
80
80
83
83
84
84
86
86
86
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
do
c
um
en
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
3
3.1
4
4.1
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamp and Parking Lamp LED Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal and Entry Lamp in Exterior Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor . . . . . .
License Plate Light X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Mounted Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Column Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access/Start Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Change Assistance Control Module with Radar Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview Camera System, Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring System from 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitters Inside Wheel Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring Antennas R207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
Description and
Operation
. . . . . . . . .oe. s.n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ksw
l
ot g
o
V
y
ua
HID Headlamp,
Vehicles from 05/31/2010, through
db
ran MY 2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
e
s
i
r
o
HID Headlamp
Overview
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .tee. o. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
h
ut
ra
a
HID
ss Headlamp, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp with Two HID Bulbs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Headlamp, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Headlamp Reflector Adjustment
Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swivel Module Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lamps, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Panel LED Tail Lamps Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Lid Tail Lamps Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Column Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Column Switch Connector Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access/Start Authorization Button E408 , Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access/Start Authorization Antennas Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Aid Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear View Camera System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tail Lamp Gap Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosis and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor,
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swivel Module Position Sensor, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs, Correcting Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs Range Control Module, Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Headlamps, Correcting Installation Position . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Swivel Module Position Sensor, Checking . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Headlamps, Correcting Installation
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Contents
86
87
87
87
88
88
89
89
89
91
92
93
93
94
95
95
96
96
99
101
101
103
103
105
106
107
108
108
108
108
110
110
112
114
114
117
119
119
120
120
122
123
123
123
123
124
124
125
125
125
125
125
126
iii
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
un
le
r
fo
ng
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Contents
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
iv
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26
5.27
5.28
5.29
5.30
5.31
5.32
5.33
5.34
6
6.1
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
5.4
Headlamp Range Control Module J431 , Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Tail Lamps, Checking Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Steering Column Electronic Systems Control Module, Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Access/Start Authorization Switch E415 , Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Access/Start Authorization Button E408 , Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Access/Start Authorization Control Module J518 , Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Access/Start Authorization Control Module J518 , Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Antenna Parameter, Access/Start Authorization Antennas, Adapting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Parking Aid Shut-Off Speed, Adapting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Supression Range for Attachments, Adapting . . . . . . . a.g.en. A. G. ..V.o.lk.sw. a.g.en. A. G. d. o. . . . . . . . . . . 130
es n
w
o
olks
Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer Volume, Adapting
y V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t .gu.a. . . . . 130
b
d
r
ir se
Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer Volume, Adapting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .a.nt.ee. . 131
ho
t
Lane Change Assist, Side Assist . . . . . s. a.u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .or.ac131
s
Rearview Camera System, Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera R242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Module J502 , Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
HID Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp (AFS), Vehicles through 05/31/2010, through MY
2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control, Vehicles through 05/31/2010, through MY
2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
HID Headlamp, Vehicles from 05/31/2010, through MY 2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Front Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Exterior Mirror Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Exterior Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
LED Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Self-Illuminating License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
License Plate Lamp X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Illuminated License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
High Mounted Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Bulb Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Steering Column Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Access/Start Authorization Switch E415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Access/Start Authorization Button E408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Access/Start Authorization Control Module J518 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Driver Access/Start Authorization Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Front Passenger Access/Start Authorization Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Access/Start Authorization Antenna in Rear Bumper R136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Luggage Compartment Access/Start Authorization Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Interior Access/Start Authorization Antenna 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Access/Start Authorization Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Interior Access/Start Authorization Antenna 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Lane Change Assistance Control Module with Radar Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Lane Change Assistance Exterior Rearview Mirror Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rearview Camera System Control Module J772 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rearview Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera R242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Directional Stabilization Assistance Windshield Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tire Pressure Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Disassembly and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Steering Column Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
4.29
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
7
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
96 - Interior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
234
234
234
234
235
235
236
236
236
243
247
253
255
262
266
267
269
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
1.5
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette Lighter U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Lamps and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Unit, Rear Seat Adjustment, 4-Seater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Unit for Front Seat Heating/Ventilation with Buttons for Dampening, ESP, and Level
Control in Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. G. ..V.o.lk.sw. a. g.e.n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AG do
n
es n. . . . . . . . . .
wage Memory, 4-Seater
Switch Unit for Rear Seat Position and Heating/Ventilation
ot g
olks
V
y
u
b
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . r.is.ed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a. ra. n.t . . . .
e
o
Left and Right Rear Footwell Lamps . .a.ut.h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .e o.r .a .
c
s
Front Door Lamps and Switches . . . .s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Door Lamps and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Lamps and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage Compartment Lamps and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof Trim Lamps and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Lamps and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Tone Horn H7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
r
fo
ng
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-Box, in Luggage Compartment on Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Panel, Under Instrument Panel on Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Fuse Box in Luggage Compartment, Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Fuse Box on Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relay Carrier in Right Front Footwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-box in Luggage Compartment on Left Side, from 05.2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-Box in Luggage Compartment, Left Side, from 06.2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-box in Plenum Chamber, Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Electrical System Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Electrical System Control Module, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3
4
Contents
270
270
270
270
271
271
272
274
275
276
277
278
280
281
282
283
v
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Contents
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
vi
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
27 –
Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
1
General Information
(Edition 03.2016)
⇒ “1.1 Warnings and Safety Precautions”, page 1
⇒ “1.2 Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Safety Precautions”,
page 2
⇒ “1.3 Battery”, page 2
⇒ “1.4 Battery Types”, page 2
⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3
⇒ “1.6 Battery, Testing”, page 3
⇒ “1.7 Battery, Charging”, page 3
⇒ “1.8 Reconnecting Battery”, page 3
⇒ “1.9 Generator Characteristics”, page 3
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
ot g
ua
b
d
ran
e
s
i
tee
r
Adaptive Cruise Control
System”,
page
4
o
h
or
ut
ac
a
Pyrotechnic Batteryss Isolator Disposal”, page 4
olks
⇒ “1.10 B+ Cable Mount on Generator”,
y V page 3
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
⇒ “1.12
⇒ “1.13 Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator ”, page 4
⇒ “1.14 Automatic Distance Regulation”, page 5
Warnings and Safety Precautions
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
1.1
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ;
General Information .
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
⇒ “1.11
1. General Information
1
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
1.2
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
03.2016
s
WARNING
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Safety Pre‐
cautions
♦ Testing, assembly, and repairs may only be performed by
trained personnel.
♦ When working on the pyrotechnic battery cut-out system,
the negative terminal clamp must be disconnected from
the battery. After disconnecting the battery, no waiting pe‐
riod is necessary.
♦ DO NOT install any pyrotechnic battery cut-out units that
have fallen onto a hard surface, or which have signs of
damage.
♦ Pyrotechnic battery cut-out units that have not deployed
should be marked and sent back to the manufacturer for
disposal (always use transport container for battery cutout units).
♦ Storage and transport are subject to laws for explosive
substances.
1.3
Battery
WARNING
Risk of injury. Observe warning notes and safety precautions.
Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Warnings and Safety Precautions”, page 1 !
Caution
In order to prevent damage to the battery or vehicle, observe
battery type descriptions and notes. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Battery Types”, page 2 .
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ;
General Information .
1.4
Battery Types
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ;
General Information .
2
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
♦ Battery cut-out units must not be left unattended.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ If the work sequence is interrupted, place the battery cutout unit into the transport container again.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ The pyrotechnic battery cut-out units must be installed im‐
mediately after being removed from the transport contain‐
er.
do
c
um
en
♦ Before coming into contact with the pyrotechnic battery
cut-out, the technician must discharge their electrostatic
charge. This is achieved by touching grounded metal
parts, such as for example, water lines, heating pipes, or
metal supports.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.5
Battery Post/Terminal
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ;
General Information .
1.6
Battery, Testing
olkswagen AG
en AG. V
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
wag
All instructions and information on this chapter can
olks be found in
yV
the repair manual ⇒ Electrical Equipment eGeneral
Information;
b
d
Rep. Gr. 27 ; Diagnosis and Testing . horis
un
le
Battery, Charging
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1.7
t
au
ss
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
1.8
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the repair manual ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information;
Rep. Gr. 27 ; Diagnosis and Testing .
Reconnecting Battery
Work steps
performed
If necessary, the table can be printed out.
Generator Characteristics
AG.
In vehicles with 8 and 12-cylinder engines, the generators have
the following features:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Based on engine variations, different types of generators were
installed.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
1.9
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Switch ignition on, and then off.
Read the DTC memory: ⇒ guided fault
finding using -VAS5051BSteering angle sensor: Perform zero com‐
pensation ⇒ guided fault finding with VAS5051BElectrical window regulators: Open all
windows completely, and then close
Check function: All electrical consumers
♦ The generator is driven by a ribbed belt.
♦ The engine coolant circuit cools the generator.
♦ The voltage regulator cannot be replaced separately. If a re‐
pair is necessary, the entire generator must be replaced.
1.10
B+ Cable Mount on Generator
Caution
If the B+ wire is not tightened to the specification, the following
may occur:
♦ Battery will not be completely charged.
♦ The complete electrical/electronics systems may fail (dis‐
abled vehicle).
♦ Fire hazard due to arcing.
♦ Damage to electronic components and control modules
caused by excessive voltage.
1. General Information
3
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Tightening specification of B+ wire nut -arrow- is 20 Nm.
1.11
Adaptive Cruise Control System
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ;
General Information .
n AG. Volkswagen AG
does
wage Isolator Disposal
Pyrotechnic VBattery
not
olks
g
y
db
ise
r
tho
WARNING
au
s
s
ua
ran
tee
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
♦ Deployed pyrotechnic battery cut-out units can be dis‐
posed of as commercial waste.
1.13
Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator
Caution
r
fo
ng
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ Observe the safety precautions for working on the pyro‐
technic battery cut-out. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .
AG.
♦ Follow the instructions for disposing of the pyrotechnic
battery isolator. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Disposal”, page 4 .
4
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
The battery, in the right side of the trunk, is equipped with a
battery cut-off to increase crash safety. In the event of a colli‐
sion, the airbag control module triggers a separation, which
disrupts the power supply wiring to the starter. The battery cutoff takes place pyrotechnically through a very small explosive
charge. To prevent inadvertently triggering separation while
working on the battery or batteries, or the battery cut-out, al‐
ways
perform
the
work
procedure.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
♦ Pyrotechnic battery cut-out units that have not deployed
must be returned in original packaging for proper recy‐
cling/disposal in accordance with national legislation!
Contact your service center or importer if you have ques‐
tions.
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
1.12
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.14
Automatic Distance Regulation
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Refer to Self Study Program No. 276; Phaeton - Automatic Dis‐
tance Regulation (ADR).
Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component loca‐
tions.
General Description
The Automatic Distance Control (ACC adaptive cruise control) is
an expanded function of the Cruise Control System (CCS). By
reducing engine torque and any braking intervention, an ACCvehicle maintains an adjustable following distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of it. The status of the ACC system is influenced by
the button on the left side of the multifunction steering wheel, the
accelerator and brake pedals, the selector lever as well as by
other assistance systems in within the brake system.
DTC Recognition and Display
Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- is equipped with On
Board Diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Refer to the Owner's Manual.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Additional information:
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
1. General Information
5
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2
Description and Operation
⇒ “2.1 Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Overview”, page 6
4.2L ⇒ “2.2 Generator Overview”, page 7
4.2L ⇒ “2.3 Starter Overview”, page 8
6.0L ⇒ “2.4 Generator Overview”, page 9
6.0L ⇒ “2.5 Starter Overview”, page 10
⇒ “2.6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Overview”, page 11
2.1
Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Overview
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
1 - Pyrotechnic Battery Cut- ise
nte
r
eo
Out Threaded Connection utho
ra
a
c
s
s
❑ 20 Nm
❑ In the luggage compart‐
ment on the right side
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
2 - Lead for Starter
3 - To Battery Positive Termi‐
nal
4 - For the Pyrotechnic Battery
Cut-Out Threaded Connection
5 - Multi-Pin Connection Igniter
6 - Housing for the Pyrotechnic
Battery Cut-Out and Igniter
6
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
If the pyrotechnic battery cut-out has
been deployed, then the battery cutout system must be replaced. The
system consists of the battery posi‐
tive terminal clamp -7-, the battery
cut-out housing -6-, as well as the
wiring -2- from the battery to the
threaded connection.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Note
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
8 - Harnesses for Battery Mon‐
itoring Control Module
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
7 - Positive Terminal Clamp
❑ Battery, disconnecting
and connecting. Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Discon‐
necting and Connecting
Sequence”, page 15 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.2
Generator Overview
Caution
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always per‐
form
the
work
procedure.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 . If the sequence is not followed, the pyrotechnic
battery isolation system switch
may trigger, which may dam‐
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
age electrical components
wagein the vehicle.
s
k
l
o
o
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Note
Generator, checking: ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting &
Component locations.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
yV
db
ir se
ho
ut
a
ss
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
1 - Angle Bracket
2 - Socket Head Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
❑ M6 x 20 mm
3 - Coolant Pipe
4 - Clamp
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Prote
cted
by
7 - Generator
❑ Mounting, B+ wire to
generator, 15 Nm. Refer
to
⇒ “1.10 B+ Cable Mount
on Generator”, page 3
❑ Neither the voltage reg‐
ulator nor the carbon
brushes can be re‐
placed individually; if a
repair is required, the
entire generator must
be replaced.
❑ Generator, removing
and installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.13 Generator”,
page 31
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
6 - O-Ring
❑ Always replace
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
5 - Coolant Hose
❑ Connection diagram for
coolant hoses. Refer to
⇒ Engine Mechanical,
Fuel Injection and Igni‐
tion; Rep. Gr. 19 ; De‐
scription and Opera‐
tion .
8 - Ribbed Belt
❑ Ribbed belt, checking. Refer to ⇒ “3.2 Ribbed Belt, Checking”, page 13
9 - Bolt with Washer
❑ 30 Nm
2. Description and Operation
7
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
❑ M8 x 90
Not Illustrated
♦ Ribbed belt pulley to generator: 65 Nm
2.3
Starter Overview
1 - Nut, Wire Terminal 50 to
Starter Solenoid Switch
❑ 8 Nm
❑ M6
2 - Wire, Terminal 50
un
le
r
fo
ng
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
♦ Engine support to cylinder block: 60 Nm
♦ Engine support to engine mount: 75 Nm
♦ Ground wire to engine support: 25 Nm
8
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
Prote
cted
by
♦ Lower bolt, starter: 65 Nm
AG.
♦ Upper bolt, starter: 65 Nm
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
No Illustration
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
5 - Mounting Nut B+ Wire to
Starter
❑ 15 Nm
❑ M8
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4 - B+ Wire
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
3 - Starter
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.14 Starter”,
page 33
❑ Checking. Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Starter B ,
Checking”, page 13
2.4
Electrical Equipment
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
ara
db
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
- Edition 03.2016
Generator Overview
Note
Generator, checking: ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting &
Component locations.
1 - Angle Bracket
AG.
5 - Coolant Hose
❑ Connection diagram for
coolant hoses. Refer to
⇒ Engine Mechanical,
Fuel Injection and Igni‐
tion; Rep. Gr. 19 ; De‐
scription and Opera‐
tion .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
4 - Clamp
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
3 - Coolant Pipe
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2 - Collar Bolt
❑ 9 Nm
❑ M6 x 20 mm
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always per‐
form
the
work
procedure.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 . If the sequence is not followed, the pyrotechnic
battery isolation system switch may trigger, which may dam‐
age electrical components in the vehicle.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Caution
6 - O-Ring
❑ Always replace
7 - Countersunk Bolts
❑ 20 Nm
❑ M8x35 mm
8 - Bracket
9 - Ribbed Belt
❑ Checking ribbed belt.
Refer to
⇒ “3.2 Ribbed Belt,
2. Description and Operation
9
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Checking”, page 13 .
10 - Socket Head Bolts with Washers
❑ 20 Nm
❑ M8 x 90
11 - Generator
❑ Mounting, B+ wire to generator, 15 Nm. Refer to ⇒ “1.10 B+ Cable Mount on Generator”, page 3
❑ Neither the voltage regulator nor the carbon brushes can be replaced individually; if a repair is required,
the entire generator must be replaced.
❑ Generator, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.15 Generator”, page 36
12 - Coolant Pipe
13 - Coolant Hose
❑ Connection diagram for coolant hoses. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep.
Gr. 19 ; Description and Operation .
Not Illustrated
♦ Ribbed belt pulley to generator shaft: 80 Nm
2.5
Starter Overview
1 - Upper Starter Bolt
❑ 65 Nm
❑ M10 x 160
4 - Nut, Positive Wire to Sole‐
noid Switch
❑ 18 Nm
5 - Protective Cap
6 - Positive Cable
7 - Lower Bolt, Starter
❑ 65 Nm
❑ M12x90
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
10
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
9 - Starter
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.16 Starter”,
page 37
❑ Checking. Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Starter B ,
Checking”, page 13
r
fo
ng
8 - Bolt, Ground Wire to Cylin‐
der Block
❑ 18 Nm
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
3 - Nut, Wire Terminal 50 to
Starter Solenoid Switch
❑ 6 Nm
un
le
2 - Wire, Terminal 50
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.6
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Over‐
view
⇒ “2.6.1 ACC Version 1”, page 11
⇒ “2.6.2 ACC Version 2”, page 11
ACC Version 1
1-
Bumper carrier
2-
Connector
3-
Distance Regulation Control Module - J428-
4-
Bolts
ACC Version 2
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
2.6.2
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2.6.1
2. Description and Operation
11
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Control Unit in Steering
Wheel - E221♦ Control Unit in Steering
Wheel - E221- , removing
and installing. Refer to ⇒
Communication; Rep. Gr.
91 ; Removal and Installa‐
tion .
2 - Adaptive Cruise Control Re‐
lease/Pressure Switch in
Brake Booster - F318♦ Adaptive Cruise Control
Release/Pressure Switch
in Brake Booster - F318- ,
removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ Brake System;
Rep. Gr. 47 ; Removal and
Installation .
3 - Distance Regulation Con‐
trol Module - J428-
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
♦ Distance Regulation Con‐
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
trol Module - J428- , remov‐
l
o
V
gu
y
bto
ara
ing and installing. Refer
d
nte
se
i
r
⇒ “4.18 Adaptive Cruise
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
Control Module”,s a
c
s
page 40 .
pe
rm
itte
d
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
♦ Distance Regulation Con‐
trol Module - J428- , initial‐
izing. Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Automatic Distance
Regulation, Initializing”, page 14 .
4 - Brake Booster Control Module - J539-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
12
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Brake booster control module, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.19 Brake Booster Control Module”, page 42 .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
♦ Adaptive Cruise Control
Sensor - G550- , calibrat‐
ing. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Adaptive Cruise
Control Sensor G550 , Cal‐
ibrating”, page 13 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
3
Diagnosis and Testing
⇒ “3.1 Starter B , Checking”, page 13
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is page
r
Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor G550 , Calibrating”,
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
⇒ “3.2 Ribbed Belt, Checking”, page 13
⇒ “3.3
13
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
3.1
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
⇒ “3.4 Automatic Distance Regulation, Initializing”, page 14
Starter - B- , Checking
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding on the -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦ 27 - Starter, power supply
♦ Electrical Components
Ribbed Belt, Checking
– Turn over engine at vibration damper/belt pulley using a sock‐
et wrench.
AG.
♦ Cracks in the underside (surface cracks, fragmenting, crosssection breaks)
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Check the ribbed belt for:
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
3.2
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
♦ Starter B
♦ Layer separation (outer layer, tension cords)
♦ Wear-through on the underside
♦ Fraying of tension cords
♦ Edge wear (material wear, frayed edges, hardened edges
glazed edges, surface cracks)
♦ Oil and grease traces
Caution
If defects are discovered, the ribbed belt must be replaced im‐
mediately. Thereby, failures and malfunctions can be preven‐
ted.
3.3
Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor G550- , Calibrating
Adaptive cruise control sensor in Distance Regulation Control
Module - J428- is to be calibrated:
♦ After every suspension adjustment
♦ Whenever the adaptive cruise control sensors removed, in‐
stalled or replaced
♦ Whenever the subframe is removed, installed or replaced
3. Diagnosis and Testing
13
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
♦ Considering physical forces such as collision damage or sim‐
ilar
♦ If there are complaints regarding the adaptive cruise control
(ACC)
Adaptive cruise control sensor, calibrating: refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Diagnosis and Testing
3.4
Automatic Distance Regulation, Initializ‐
ing
Note
Initialization is required only when first using or replacing the Dis‐
tance Regulation Control Module - J428- .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . G
Refer to
A . Volkswagen AG d
agenInformation Systems”,
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing
and
oes
w
s
k
not
Vol
gu
page 270 .
by
a
un
le
r
fo
ng
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
14
ran
tee
or
ac
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
d
ise
r
– Initialize the Adaptive uCruise
Control (ACC) using the Vehicle
tho
a
Diagnostic Tester. ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4
Removal and Installation
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15
⇒ “4.2 Battery Disconnecting Sequence, Vehicles with Electric
Closing Assist”, page 16
⇒ “4.3 Battery in Right Side of Luggage Compartment, Discon‐
necting”, page 18
⇒ “4.4 Battery in Right Side of Luggage Compartment, Connect‐
ing”, page 18
⇒ “4.5 Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment, Discon‐
necting”, page 19
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
does
wa
⇒ “4.6 Battery in VLeft
Connect‐
not
olks Side of Luggage Compartment,
gu
y
ara
ing”, page 19ed b
nte
is
or
⇒ “4.9 Battery Cut-Out Relay J7 ”, page 26
⇒ “4.10 Pyrotechnic Battery Cut-Out”, page 28
⇒ “4.11 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 ”, page 29
⇒ “4.12 Starter Battery Temperature Sensor G331 ”, page 30
4.2L ⇒ “4.13 Generator”, page 31
4.2L ⇒ “4.14 Starter”, page 33
6.0L ⇒ “4.15 Generator”, page 36
6.0L ⇒ “4.16 Starter”, page 37
⇒ “4.17 Ribbed Belt Pulley on Generator”, page 39
⇒ “4.19 Brake Booster Control Module”, page 42
Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting
Sequence
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
WARNING
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.1
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
⇒ “4.18 Adaptive Cruise Control Module”, page 40
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
⇒ “4.8 Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment”,
page 23
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
th
⇒ “4.7 Battery
in Right Side of Luggage Compartment”,e or a
au
c
s
s
page 20
Risk of injury. Observe warning notes and safety precautions.
Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Warnings and Safety Precautions”, page 1 !
Caution
To increase crash safety, the battery in the luggage compart‐
ment on right side is equipped with a battery cut-out. In the
event of a collision, the airbag control module triggers a sepa‐
ration, which disrupts the power supply wiring to the starter.
The battery cut-off takes place pyrotechnically through a very
small explosive charge. To avoid accidentally triggering the
charge when working on the battery/batteries or the battery
isolator, it is absolutely essential to follow the instructions as
described in the Repair Manual.
4. Removal and Installation
15
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Caution
If the sequence is not followed, the pyrotechnic battery isola‐
tion system switch may trigger, which may damage electrical
components in the vehicle.
Disconnecting
1.
Disconnect the battery in the right side of the luggage com‐
partment. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 Battery in Right Side of Luggage Compartment, Dis‐
connecting”, page 18 .
2.
Disconnect the battery in the left side of the luggage com‐
partment. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment, Dis‐
connecting”, page 19 .
Connecting
Caution
♦ If the sequence is not followed, the pyrotechnic battery
isolation system switch may trigger, which may damage
electrical components in the vehicle.
♦ Observe notes for threaded connections of battery termi‐
nals. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3 .
3.
4.
Connect battery in right side of luggage compartment. Refer
to
⇒ “4.4 Battery in Right Side of Luggage Compartment, Con‐
necting”, page 18 .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
4.2
Battery Disconnecting Sequence, Vehi‐
cles with Electric Closing Assist
WARNING
Risk of injury. Observe warning notes and safety precautions.
Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Warnings and Safety Precautions”, page 1 !
Caution
AG.
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
16
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
The battery, on the right side in the trunk, is equipped with a
battery cut-off to increase crash safety. In the event of a colli‐
sion, the airbag control module triggers a separation, which
disrupts the power supply wiring to the starter. The battery cutoff takes place pyrotechnically through a very small explosive
charge. To avoid accidentally triggering the charge when work‐
ing on the battery/batteries or the battery isolator, it is abso‐
lutely essential to follow the instructions as described in the
Repair Manual.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
necting”, page 19 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
a
d
e the left side of the luggage compart‐ ran
Connect the batteryrisin
tee
o
h
or
ment. Refer to ut
ac
a
s Left Side of Luggage Compartment, Con‐
⇒ “4.6 Battery sin
Phaeton 2003 ➤
03.2016
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Caution
agen AG
n AG. VolkswElectrical
- Edition
doeEquipment
wage
s no
s
k
l
o
t gu
V
y
b
ara
ed
nte
ris
eo
ho
t
u
ra
a
c
ss
By removing the battery negative terminal clamp (current disrup‐
tion), safe work on the electrical system is guaranteed. Discon‐
necting the battery positive terminal must only be performed as
required to remove battery from vehicle, and must only be carried
out after the negative terminal is disconnected. However, observe
notes for disconnecting battery in any case.
Always follow the work procedures exactly!
– Switch on ignition.
r
fo
ng
– Lock the doors from the inside using the central locking button
in the driver door. Driver's door remains open when doing this.
– While the rear lid is closing, stop it when it reaches a 45° angle
or when the rear lid lock is removed. The rear lid remains in
the emergency position.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Lock the rear lid by pressing the button the front of the rear lid.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Open rear lid.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
Note
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
If the sequence is not followed, the pyrotechnic battery isola‐
tion system switch may trigger, which may damage electrical
components in the vehicle.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
After waiting 60 seconds:
– Pull the right storage compartment in luggage compartment
forward -arrows- and remove.
– First, remove the negative terminal clamp -1- from battery
negative terminal.
To switch off the vehicle with the batteries disconnected, close
the rear lid slowly and carefully. Close all the doors and manually
lock the vehicle at the driver door using the key.
4. Removal and Installation
17
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.3
Battery in Right Side of Luggage Com‐
partment, Disconnecting
Note
Always follow the work procedures exactly!
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
After waiting 60 seconds:
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– First, remove the negative terminal clamp -1- from battery
negative terminal.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
– Then disconnect the positive terminal clamp -2- from the bat‐
tery positive terminal.
4.4
Battery in Right Side of Luggage Com‐
partment, Connecting
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
18
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Pull the right storage compartment in luggage compartment
forward -arrows- and remove.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
required to remove battery from vehicle, and must only be carried
out after the negative terminal is disconnected. However, observe
notes for disconnecting battery in any case.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
By removing the battery negative
is terminal clamp (current disrup‐
r
o
eo
h
tion), safe work on the electrical
system is guaranteed. Discon‐
ut
ra
a
c
s
necting the battery positive
s terminal must only be performed as
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Place the positive terminal clamp -2- onto the battery positive
terminal.
– Tighten the positive terminal bolt to 6 Nm.
– Only after the positive terminal clamp is fastened may the
negative terminal clamp -1- be attached to the negative ter‐
minal.
– Tighten the negative terminal bolt to 6 Nm.
– Perform work steps according to table. Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Reconnecting Battery”, page 3 .
4.5
Battery in Left Side of Luggage Com‐
partment, Disconnecting
– Release the retainers -arrows- by turning counter-clockwise
and remove the cover.
– First disconnect the negative terminal clamp -arrow- from the
battery negative terminal.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
4.6
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Then disconnect the positive terminal clamp -arrow- from the
battery positive terminal.
Special tools and workshop equipment required
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331/-
do
c
um
en
Battery in Left Side of Luggage Com‐
partment, Connecting
4. Removal and Installation
19
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Place the battery positive terminal clamp -arrow- onto the bat‐
tery positive terminal.
– Tighten the positive terminal screw to 9 Nm.
– Only after the positive terminal clamp is secured, may the
negative terminal clamp -arrow- be connected to the battery
negative terminal.
– Tighten the battery negative terminal screw to 6 Nm.
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331Removing
WARNING
Risk of injury. Observe warning notes and safety precautions.
Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Warnings and Safety Precautions”, page 1 !
Caution
AG.
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
20
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
The battery, on the right side in the trunk, is equipped with a
battery cut-off to increase crash safety. In the event of a colli‐
sion, the airbag control module triggers a separation, which
disrupts the power supply wiring to the starter. The battery cutoff takes place pyrotechnically through a very small explosive
charge. To prevent inadvertently triggering separation while
working on the battery or batteries, or the battery cut-out, al‐
ways
perform
the
work
procedure.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Battery in Right Side of Luggage Com‐
partment
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
4.7
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Caution
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Remove bolt -arrow-.
r
fo
ng
– Disconnect central breather hose -arrow-.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
e
wagfol‐
When disconnecting battery, procedure must always
be
olks
V
lowed as described in the repair manual. If the sequence
is not
by
ed
ris switch may
followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system
o
th
trigger, which may damage electrical components
in the vehi‐
au
ss
cle.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Lift mounting bracket -arrow-, pull it from mounting plate at
rear, and remove.
– Slide the battery out of the floor panel adapter and lift it out.
4. Removal and Installation
21
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Note
Mounting rail adapter -arrow- may remain bolted in place for re‐
moval and replacement of battery.
Installing
Caution
If battery is not secured properly, the following risks are pos‐
sible:
♦ Shortened battery service life due to vibration damage
(explosion hazard).
♦ if battery is not secured properly, the plates within the bat‐
tery can be damaged.
♦ Damage to battery casing caused by bracket (possible
electrolyte leakage, high subsequent costs).
♦ Inadequate crash safety.
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Install the bracket and tighten the bolt -arrow- to 15 Nm.
Caution
♦ When connecting battery, always perform work proce‐
dure. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 . If the sequence is not followed, the pyrotechnic
battery isolation system switch may trigger, which may
damage electrical components in the vehicle.
♦ Observe notes for threaded connections of battery termi‐
nals. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3 .
r
fo
ng
AG.
Prote
cted
by
22
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– After installing, verify battery is properly seated.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Make sure the central gas vent hose is attached to the battery
-arrow- and that it cannot get disconnected when the battery
is being installed. Only then can battery be properly vented.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.8
Battery in Left Side of Luggage Com‐
partment
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
Risk of injury. Observe warning notes and safety precautions.
Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Warnings and Safety Precautions”, page 1 !
Caution
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
When disconnecting battery, procedure must always be fol‐
lowed as described in the repair manual. If the sequence is not
followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch may
trigger, which may damage electrical components in the vehi‐
cle.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Caution
r
fo
ng
The battery, on the right side in the trunk, is equipped with a
battery cut-off to increase crash safety. In the event of a colli‐
sion, the airbag control module triggers a separation, which
disrupts the power supply wiring to the starter. The battery cutoff takes place pyrotechnically through a very small explosive
charge. To prevent inadvertently triggering separation while
working on the battery or batteries, or the battery cut-out, al‐
ways
perform
the
work
procedure.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
WARNING
un
le
Removing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Prote
cted
by
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Remove E-box in luggage compartment at left. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 E-Box, in Luggage Compartment on Left Side”,
page 270 .
A revised version of the E-box and its carrier plate is being in‐
stalled as of 06.2003.
Note
E-box carrier plate must be removed in order to remove and install
battery.
4. Removal and Installation
23
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Only for Vehicles from 05.2005
– Remove bolts -1-.
– Remove E-box mounting plate -2-.
Only for Vehicles from 06.2003
– Release catch -arrow C- and remove carrier plate -1- from
lower bracket.
– Swing mounting plate -1- upward -arrow B- and lift out from
upper brackets -arrows A-.
Note
Carrier plate pivots in upper brackets are elliptical and can only
be removed if carrier plate is pivoted upward.
n AG. Volkswagen AG
AG.
un
le
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
24
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove bolt -arrow-.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
from top
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
cover.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
age
ksw
Vol
y
b
Continued for All Vehicles
ed
ris
o
h
t
au
ss vent hose -arrow– Disconnect central gas
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ss
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
o
yV
db
e
ris
tho
au
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Lift mounting bracket -arrow-, pull it from mounting plate at
AG. Volkswagen AG d
rear, and remove.
agen
oes
n
lksw
– Slide battery -1- toward front of vehicle -arrow- and out of bat‐
tery clamping strip rail -2-.
– Grasp battery at handles and swing it 90° when lifting it out.
Installing
Caution
♦ Shortened battery service life due to vibration damage
(explosion hazard).
AG.
♦ Inadequate crash safety.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
♦ Damage to battery casing caused by bracket (possible
electrolyte leakage, high subsequent costs).
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ If battery is not secured properly, the plates within the bat‐
tery can be damaged.
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
If battery is not secured properly, the following will result:
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Grasp battery at handles and swing it 90° when placing it in.
– Place battery on battery tray and push it under clamping rail.
– Make sure the central gas vent hose is attached to the battery
-arrow- and that it cannot get disconnected when the battery
is being installed. Only then can battery be properly vented.
Only for Vehicles from 05.2005
4. Removal and Installation
25
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Install the E-box carrier plate -2- and tighten the bolts -1- to 6
Nm.
Only for Vehicles from 06.2003
Note
Carrier plate pivots are elliptical and can only be installed if carrier
plate is pivoted upward.
– Engage carrier plate -1- pivoted upward in upper brackets
-arrows A-.
– Swivel mounting plate down and fasten to lower bracket
-arrow C-.
Continued for All Vehicles
⇒ “1.2 E-Box, in Luggage Compartment on Left Side”,
page 270 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
–
un
le
–
♦ When connecting battery, always perform work proce‐
dure. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 . If the sequence is not followed, the pyrotechnic
battery isolation system switch may trigger, which may
damage electrical components in the vehicle.
♦ Observe notes for threaded connections of battery termi‐
nals. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3 .
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
r
fo
ng
Battery Cut-Out Relay - J7c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Special tools and workshop equipment required
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
26
agen
lksw
Vo
by
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.9
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
Caution
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
–
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
Install the bracket and tighten the bolt -arrow- toy 15
ot g
Vo Nm.
ua
b
ran
ed
s
i
tee
r
After installing, verify battery is properly seated.
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
Install E-box in luggage compartment at
ss left. Refer to
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Removing
Caution
When disconnecting battery, procedure must always be fol‐
lowed as described in the repair manual. If the sequence is not
followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch may
trigger, which may damage electrical components in the vehi‐
cle.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Remove the second battery in the left side of the luggage
compartment. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment”,
. Volkswagen AG
page 23 .
gen AG
d
wa
olks
oes
no
V
– Disconnect thedconnector
from the battery cut-outt grelay
ua
by
ran
ise
-arrow-.
tee
r
o
h
ut
– Remove the battery cut-out relay from the mount.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Release the protective covers -arrows- and open them.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
– Removess the
nuts -1- from the battery cut-out relay.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Remove the nut -arrows- and disconnect the wires from the
battery cut-out relay.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Tighten all threaded connections to the tightening specifica‐
tions:
4. Removal and Installation
27
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Nuts -1- battery cut-out relay to mount: (M6) 6 Nm.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Install the second battery in the left side of the luggage com‐
partment. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment”,
page 23 .
Caution
♦ When connecting battery, always perform work procedure
as described in repair manual. If the sequence is not fol‐
lowed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch
may trigger, which may damage electrical components in
the vehicle. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15
♦ Observe notes for threaded connections of battery termi‐
nals. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3 .
Pyrotechnic Battery Cut-Out
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
AG.
Prote
cted
by
4.10
WARNING
Observe the safety precautions for working on the pyrotechnic
battery
cut-out.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.2 Pyrotechnic Battery Isolator Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331Removing
Caution
When disconnecting battery, procedure must always be fol‐
lowed as described in the repair manual. If the sequence is not
followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch may
trigger, which may damage electrical components in the vehi‐
cle.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
28
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Nuts -arrows- to the battery cut-out relay: (M8) 20 Nm.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Remove the luggage compartment floor covering.
– Remove trim on the right in luggage compartment. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
– If necessary, remove the lead coating on the multi-pin con‐
nector.
– Pull up the protective cap of the multi-pin connector -1-, re‐
lease the retaining tab -2- and separate the connector.
–
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Tighten the threaded connections -arrow- (M8) to 20 Nm.
– If necessary, replace the lead coating on the multi-pin con‐
nector for the igniter.
Caution
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
♦ Observe notes for threaded connections of battery termi‐
nals. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ When connecting battery, always perform work procedure
as described in repair manual. If the sequence is not fol‐
lowed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch
may trigger, which may damage electrical components in
the vehicle. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
–
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
e
wage
s
k
l
o
Remove the cover -1- after releasing
the retaining tabs -2- and s not g
yV
ua
b
ran
remove the nuts -3-.
ed
tee
ris
o
h
t
or
u holders and cable guides and re‐
Unclip the wiring from the
ac
a
s
s
move the starter lead with the battery cut-off.
AG.
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
4.11
Battery Monitoring Control Module J367-
Special tools and workshop equipment required
4. Removal and Installation
29
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Caution
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Removing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
When disconnecting battery, procedure must always be fol‐
lowed as described in the repair manual. If the sequence is not
followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch may
trigger, which may damage electrical components in the vehi‐
cle.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Prote
cted
by
– Tighten the bolts -2- to 6 Nm.
Caution
♦ When connecting battery, always perform work procedure
as described in repair manual. If the sequence is not fol‐
lowed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch
may trigger, which may damage electrical components in
the vehicle. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
♦ Observe notes for threaded connections of battery termi‐
nals. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3 .
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
4.12
Starter Battery Temperature Sensor G331-
The temperature sensor is located on the negative terminal of the
battery.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
30
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Installing
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove bolts -2-.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -1-.
do
c
um
en
– Remove the second battery in the left side of the luggage
compartment. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment”,
page 23 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Pull the storage compartment forward -arrows- and remove it.
– Release and disconnect the connector -arrow-.
– Carefully release the
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
retaining
tabs, using a screwdriver.
ac
a
ss
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Installing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Remove temperature sensor from holder.
4.13
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Install in reverse order of removal.
Generator
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Caution
When disconnecting battery, procedure must always be fol‐
lowed as described in the repair manual. If the sequence is not
followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch may
trigger, which may damage electrical components in the vehi‐
cle.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Removing
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
♦ Mandrel - T10060-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
4. Removal and Installation
31
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
50 ; Description and Operation .
o
olks
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
V
by
a
ss
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Caution
un
le
d
– Drain the coolant. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, FuelriseInjec‐
o
h
tion and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 19 ; General Informationut.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Before removing ribbed belt, mark the top side and direction of
travel. When installing, pay attention to correct running direc‐
tion and installation position. If the belt is installed in the oppo‐
site running direction or is positioned incorrectly, the belt will
fail!
– Relieve tension on the ribbed belt by pivoting the tensioning
element using a 19 mm open end wrench.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
32
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove the B+ lead -arrow- from the generator.
do
c
um
en
– Remove the protective cap -1- and separate the connector
-2-.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Lock tensioner using -T10060- .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the bolt -1- and remove the bracket -2- for the coolant
lines from the generator.
– Remove coolant lines -3- from generator.
Note
The coolant hoses may remain connected to the coolant pipes.
–
Installing
♦ When installing an already used ribbed belt, note direction
of travel marked when it was removed!
♦ Before installing the ribbed belt, make sure all drive ac‐
cessories (generator, air conditioner compressor, power
steering pump) are secured in place.
♦ When installing the ribbed belt, make sure it is properly
seated in the belt pulley!
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Tighten the threaded connections to the specification given in
the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator Overview”, page 7 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Replace the coolant line gaskets.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Caution
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
–
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
Remove generator
bolts -arrows-.
h
t
or
u
ac
a
s
s
Remove generator from bracket.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Fill the coolant. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injection
and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 19 ; General Information .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Caution
♦ When connecting the battery, always perform the work
procedure as described in the repair manual. If the se‐
quence is not followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation
system switch may trigger, which may damage electrical
components in the vehicle. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
♦ Observe notes for threaded connections on battery poles.
Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Battery Post/Terminal”, page 3 .
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Start the engine and verify that the belt is running properly.
4.14
Starter
Special tools and workshop equipment required
4. Removal and Installation
33
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1332♦ Shop Crane - VAS6100♦ Lifting Tackle - 3033un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Removing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
pe
rm
itte
d
– Remove the engine. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel In‐
jection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 10 ; Removal and Installation .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Remove the exhaust manifold. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical,
Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 26 ; Description and Op‐
eration .
– Hook in the -3033- at the right cylinder head.
AG.
– Remove the bolt for the engine support -1- and the bolt for the
line retainer -2-.
34
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Lift the engine with the -VAS 6100- .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove the bolt for the line retainer -1- and the bolts for the
engine support -2- and -3-.
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Hook the -3033- into the -VAS6100- .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the bolt for the engine support -arrow-.
– Remove the bolt -arrow- for the ground (GND) cable from the
engine support.
– Set the cable aside.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Pull off the protective cover -arrow-.
Caution
♦ The solenoid switch can be damaged.
♦ The threaded connections can twist themselves and dam‐
age the solenoid switch.
♦ When removing and installing nuts at positive terminal and
terminal 50, counterhold the threaded connection at the
solenoid switch using an open-end wrench.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Set the wires aside.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove the wire terminal 50 -1- and the positive wire -2- nuts
from the starter solenoid switch.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
– Remove the
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
engine support.
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
4. Removal and Installation
35
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the lower bolt for the starter -arrow- on the engine
side.
– Remove the upper bolt for the starter
sion side.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Installing
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
– Remove starter.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
Vo transmis‐
-arrow- on
y the
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Caution
♦ The solenoid switch can be damaged.
♦ The threaded connections can twist themselves and dam‐
age the solenoid switch.
♦ When removing and installing nuts at positive terminal and
terminal 50, counterhold the threaded connection at the
solenoid switch using an open-end wrench.
Generator
Special tools and workshop equipment required
Prote
cted
by
36
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
– Remove engine. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injection
and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 10 ; Removal and Installation .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Removing
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.15
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Tighten the threaded connections to the specification given in
the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Starter Overview”, page 8 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the M6 x 25 hex bolt -arrow-.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
– Remove the coolant pipe angle bracket.
agen
o
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
w
olks
V
– Pull coolant pipes off generator.
by
ed
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
The coolant hoses may remain connected to the coolant pipes.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
– Remove the B+ lead and separate the DF lead connector from
the generator.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note
ris
ho
ut
a
ss
Caution
Before removing ribbed belt, mark the top side and direction of
travel. When installing, pay attention to correct running direc‐
tion and installation position. If the belt is installed in the oppo‐
site running direction or is positioned incorrectly, the belt will
fail!
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Remove ribbed belt.
do
c
um
en
– To relieve tension of the ribbed belt, pivot the tensioner at the
hex -1- using a 30 mm open-end wrench until the ribbed belt
tension is relieved.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove the M8 x 90 bolts -arrows- on the generator.
– Remove generator from bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Caution
♦ When installing an already used ribbed belt, note direction
of travel marked when it was removed!
♦ Before installing the ribbed belt, make sure all drive ac‐
cessories (generator, air conditioner compressor, power
steering pump) are secured in place.
♦ When installing the ribbed belt, make sure it is properly
seated in the belt pulley!
– Tighten the threaded connections to the specification given in
the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Generator Overview”, page 9 .
4.16
Starter
Special tools and workshop equipment required
4. Removal and Installation
37
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1332Removing
– Remove the engine. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel In‐
jection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 10 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove the M8 x 20 hex bolt -arrow- from the ground (GND)
wire.
– Remove the cap -1- from the starter solenoid switch.
Caution
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
The threaded connections can twist themselves and dam‐ rised
nte
o
eo
h
age the solenoid switch.
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
♦ The solenoid switch can be damaged.
♦
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
♦ When removing and installing nuts at positive terminal and
terminal 50, counterhold the threaded connection at the
solenoid switch using an open-end wrench.
– Remove the wire terminal 30 -2- and terminal 50 -3- nuts and
disconnect the wires from the solenoid switch.
– Remove the upper hex bolt -1- (sectional drawing transmis‐
sion housing) M10 x 160 from the transmission housing.
– Remove the lower bolt -2- (sectional drawing transmission
housing) M12 x 90 from the transmission housing.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
♦ The threaded connections can twist themselves and dam‐
age the solenoid switch.
38
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
– Tighten the threaded connections to the specification given in
the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Starter Overview”, page 10 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
♦ When removing and installing nuts at positive terminal and
terminal 50, counterhold the threaded connection at the
solenoid switch using an open-end wrench.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
♦ The solenoid switch can be damaged.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Caution
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.17
Ribbed Belt Pulley on Generator
Note
Ribbed belt pulley cannot be replaced on vehicles with 12-cylinder
gasoline engine. If a repair is necessary, the entire generator
must be replaced.
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1332♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400Removing
– Remove generator. Refer to 4.2L. Refer to
⇒ “4.13 Generator”, page 31 or 6.0L. Refer to
⇒ “4.15 Generator”, page 36 .
– Tighten the generator in a vise at the mounting points.
– Remove the cap from the ribbed belt pulley with freewheel.
Note
The threads on the generator shaft are left-handed thread, there‐
fore, rotate it clockwise to loosen and counter-clockwise to tight‐
en.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
w
– Insert the multi-point adapter 3400 -1- with a 17 mm open-end
olks
yV
b
d
wrench into the ribbed belt pulley with freewheel -2- of isthe
e
r
generator. Then, insert a multi-point socket insert M10
ho -3- into
t
au
the generator shaft.
ss
– Loosen the threaded connection by rotating clockwise, while
counter holding with the box-end wrench.
Installing
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Hold ribbed belt pulley with freewheel in place by hand and
turn at generator driveshaft until ribbed belt pulley with free‐
wheel can be removed.
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Attach the ribbed belt pulley with freewheel to the generator
input shaft all the way by hand.
Torque wrench must be reassembled for installing overrunning
clutch pulley as follows:
– Release the insert -1- and remove it from the handle part -2-.
– Rotate the handle -2- of the torque wrench 180 degrees and
re-insert the bit.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
4. Removal and Installation
do
c
um
en
– Set the rotation direction of the torque wrench bit to left.
39
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Counterhold the -3400- -1- with a 17 mm open-end wrench
and tighten the free-wheeling belt pulley by rotating the gen‐
erator driveshaft counter-clockwise with the torque wrench
-2-. The tightening specification is 80 Nm.
– Install the cap onto the ribbed belt pulley with freewheel.
Adaptive Cruise Control Module
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
⇒ “4.18.2 Distance Regulation Control Module J428 Version 2”,
page 41
4.18.1
Distance Regulation Control Module J428- Version 1
The Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- is installed at the
front of the vehicle behind the right bumper.
The Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- cannot be dis‐
assembled further and contains the following components:
♦ Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor - G550♦ Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor Heater - Z47Removing:
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical consumers and remove
the ignition key.
r
fo
ng
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Prote
cted
by
♦ Every suspension adjustment
♦ The Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor - G550- is removed, in‐
stalled or replaced
♦ The subframe is removed, installed or replaced
♦ Considering physical forces such as collision damage or sim‐
ilar
♦ There are complaints regarding the adaptive cruise control
(ACC)
Note
Calibration may only be performed using a Volkswagen/Audi ap‐
proved wheel-alignment analyzer and adjuster.
Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor - G550- , aligning. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor G550 , Calibrating”, page
13 .
40
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
AG.
The Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor - G550- in the Distance Reg‐
ulation Control Module - J428- is to be adjusted after:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Installing:
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Re‐
fer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
⇒ “4.18.1 Distance Regulation
page 40
un
le
4.18
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
Control
Module
J428
Version
1”,
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
–
olkswagen AG
en AG. V Equipment
doe-sEdition 03.2016
agElectrical
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
Start the adaptive cruise control (ACC) when first
iseusing the or
r
o
eo
h
t
replacing the Distance Regulation Control Module
J428.
u
ra
a
c
s
Refer to
s
4.18.2
Distance Regulation Control Module J428- Version 2
The Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- is installed on
the front of vehicle, behind VW-logo in the radiator grille.
The Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- cannot be dis‐
assembled further and contains the following components:
♦ Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor - G550♦ Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor Heater - Z47Removing:
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical consumers and remove
the ignition key.
– Remove the radiator grille. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Removal and Installation .
r
fo
ng
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Pivot the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- -1- for‐
ward, paying attention to lengths of connected wires.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Unclip the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- -1from the three mounts -2-.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
⇒ “3.4 Automatic Distance Regulation, Initializing”, page 14 .
4. Removal and Installation
41
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage and disconnect the connector -2- and remove the
Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- from the vehicle.
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
The Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor - G550- in the Distance Reg‐
ulation Control Module - J428- is to be adjusted after:
♦ Every suspension adjustment
♦ The Adaptive Cruise Control Sensor - G550- is removed, in‐
stalled or replaced
♦ The subframe is removed, installed or replaced
♦ Considering physical forces such as collision damage or sim‐
ilar
♦ There are complaints regarding the adaptive cruise control
(ACC)
Note
Calibration may only be performed using a Volkswagen/Audi ap‐
proved wheel-alignment analyzer and adjuster.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
w
noRefer
Adaptive Cruise Control
to
olks Sensor - G550- , aligning.
t gu
yV
ara
⇒ “3.3 Adaptive eCruise
Control Sensor G550 , Calibrating”,
page
db
nte
ris
13 .
o
e
h
t
o
au
ra
4.19
Brake Booster Control Module
Removing
Caution
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss adaptive cruise control (ACC) when first using thec or
– Start the
replacing the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- .
Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Automatic Distance Regulation, Initializing”, page 14 .
When disconnecting battery, procedure must always be fol‐
lowed as described in the repair manual. If the sequence is not
followed, the pyrotechnic battery isolation system switch may
trigger, which may damage electrical components in the vehi‐
cle.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
42
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the plenum chamber cover locks -arrows- 90°.
– Remove the plenum chamber cover.
– Remove wiper arms. Refer to
G. Volkswagen page
AG do 64 .
n ARemoving”,
⇒ “4.1.2 Wiper Arms,
e
wage
s no
t
ks
Vol
t
au
ss
or
ac
– Remove the bolts for the expansion tank -arrows-.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
gu
by cowl trim. Refer to
ara
– Removeedthe
nte
ris Plenum Chamber Cover, Removing”, page
⇒ “4.1.3
o
e 65 .
h
– Set the expansion tank aside, without damaging the connec‐
tions.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove both connectors -arrows- from the brake booster con‐
trol module.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Unclip the tabs -arrows- from the brake booster control module
on the E-box.
– Remove the brake booster control module and bracket for‐
ward.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
4. Removal and Installation
43
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5
Special Tools
Special tools and workshop
equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench VAG1331♦ Torque Wrench VAG1332♦ Shop Crane - VAS6100♦ Lifting Tackle - 3033-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information System VAS5051B-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
44
Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Diagnostic cable - VAS5051/6A-
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
♦ Mandrel - T10060-
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400-
5. Special Tools
45
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
90 –
Instruments
1
General Information
⇒ “1.1 Instrument Cluster”, page 46
⇒ “1.2 Service Interval Display, Resetting”, page 46
1.1
Instrument Cluster
DTC Recognition and Display:
The instrument cluster is equipped with On Board Diagnostic
(OBD) capabilities which assists with troubleshooting.
Use the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester in the “Guided Fault Finding”
mode for fault finding.
1.2
Service Interval Display, Resetting
Refer to ⇒ Maintenance Procedures; Rep. Gr. 03
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
46
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2
Description and Operation
⇒ “2.1 Warning Lamp Symbols in Instrument Cluster”,
page 47
⇒ “2.2 Rear Side of Instrument Cluster Overview”, page 48
⇒ “2.3 Instrument Cluster Connector
Assignment”,
olkswagen AG page 49
en AG. V
2.1
ag
ksw
Vol
y
b
ed
ris
o
h
t
au
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
Warning Lamp Symbols in Instrument
Cluster
1 - Airbag or Seat Belt Ten‐
sioning System Faulty
2 - Fasten Seat Belts!
3 - Electronic Stabilization Pro‐
gram (ESP)
❑ Blinking: the ESP or
ASR is working
❑ Illuminates: ESP mal‐
function or switched off
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
5 - Turn Signals
❑ Left and right turn signal
switch is on
❑ Emergency flasher,
both indicator lamps
blink at the same time
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4 - Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS)
❑ Illuminates: ABS is faul‐
ty
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Different instrument clusters are used, depending on vehicle
equipment. Therefore, the arrangement of the control lamps may
deviate from the illustration.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Note
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
6 - Lamp Failure
❑ Orange: HID headlamp
bulb failure
7 - Generator Load Control
❑ Illuminates: Malfunction
in generator
8 - Brake Test/Parking Brake
Control
❑ Parking brake activated
❑ Brake fluid low or brake
2. Description and Operation
47
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
system malfunction
9 - Fog Lights Switched On
10 - OBD Emissions Warning Lamp
❑ Illuminates: Malfunction in the exhaust system
11 - Auxiliary Heating Switched On
12 - Electronic Power Control (EPC)
❑ The indicator lamp is only on gasoline vehicles
13 - Depress the Brake Pedal
❑ Automatic transmission (shift lock) request
14 - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
❑ Illuminates: flat tire
15 - Fog Lights Switched On
16 - High Beams Switched On
Rear Side of Instrument Cluster Over‐
view
Note
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
48
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Do not disassemble instrument
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
cluster.
c
s
s
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2.2
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
un
le
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
2.3
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
2 - 32-Pin Connector
❑ Blue
❑ Multi-pin connector as‐
signment. Refer to
⇒ “2.3.2 32-Pin Blue
Connector”, page 50
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
1 - 32-Pin Connector
❑ Green
❑ Multi-pin connector as‐
signment. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Instrument Clus‐
ter Connector Assign‐
ment”, page 49
Instrument Cluster Connector Assign‐
ment
⇒ “2.3 Instrument Cluster Connector Assignment”, page 49
⇒ “2.3.2 32-Pin Blue Connector”, page 50
2.3.1
32-Pin Green Connector
Refer to the current wiring diagram for the pin assignment here
⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component locations.
2. Description and Operation
49
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.3.2
32-Pin Blue Connector
Refer to the current wiring diagram for the pin assignment here
⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component locations.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments
do
c
um
en
50
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
3
Diagnosis and Testing
⇒ “3.1 Instrument Cluster Replacing”, page 51
⇒ “3.2 Instrument Cluster, Coding”, page 51
3.1
Instrument Cluster Replacing
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
Select “Guided Fault Finding” on the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
– Using the “GO TO” button, select “Functions/Component se‐
lection” and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical equipment
♦ 01 - OBD capable systems
♦ Instrument cluster
♦ Instrument cluster functions
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
ot g
yV
ua
b
d
ran
e
tee
ris
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Connect the vehicle
diagnosis, testing and information system
wageinstalling
♦ Instrument cluster, removing
and
olks
3.2
Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical equipment
♦ 01 - OBD capable systems
♦ Instrument Cluster
♦ Instrument cluster functions
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
♦ Instrument cluster, coding
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
- VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
–
Instrument Cluster, Coding
3. Diagnosis and Testing
51
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4
Removal and Installation
⇒ “4.1 Instrument Cluster”, page 52
4.1
Instrument Cluster
Removing
Note
♦ It is not necessary to remove the steering wheel. To improve
clarity, the steering wheel is not shown in the following illus‐
trations.
♦ If the instrument cluster is to be replaced. Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Instrument Cluster Replacing”, page 51 .
– Adjust the steering with all the way out and then down using
the electrical adjustment mechanism.
– Loosen the covers -1- and remove the screws -2-.
– Pull the switch -3- a little toward the passenger compartment
and separate the connectors on the inner side of the switch.
– Remove the switches.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Open fuse box cover under steering wheel.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Remove both screws -1- and remove the frame -2-.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments
do
c
um
en
52
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove both screws -1- and remove the trim -2-.
– Remove both bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the instrument cluster into the passenger compart‐
ment. Pay attention the wires still connected.
– Disconnect the connectors on the back of the instrument clus‐
. Volkswagen AG
ter.
gen AG
does
swa
– Remove the instrument cluster.
Installing
k
Vol
by
d
e
ris
tho
u
a
ss
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
– Connect the connectors on the back of the instrument cluster.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Insert the instrument cluster into the opening in the instrument
panel.
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– After installing, test the functions of the instrument cluster.
4. Removal and Installation
53
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
92 –
Wiper/Washer Systems
1
General Information
⇒ “1.1 Windshield Wiper System”, page 54
⇒ “1.2 Windshield Washer System”, page 55
⇒ “1.3 Headlamp Washer System”, page 55
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55
⇒ “1.5 Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections”, page 56
⇒ “1.6 Hoses, Repairing”, page 56
1.1
Windshield Wiper System
Caution
When disconnecting and connecting battery, the procedure
must be followed as described in the Repair Manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
The front windshield wiper system consists of two mechanically
independent systems. Each wiper arm is operated by a separate
motor. The wiper motor control modules makes sure the wipers
move together.
The control modules and wiper motors are incorporated in a sin‐
gle unit.
The components are as follows:
♦ Driver Windshield Wiper Motor - V216♦ Wiper Motor Control Module - J400- (driver side)
AG. Volkswagen A
gen
swa
G do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
olk - V217♦ Front Passenger Windshield Wiper bMotor
yV
d
se
s
pe
rm
itte
d
To minimize wiper blade deformation, the wiper arms are moved
to two different park positions when switched off. These alternate
each time the system is switched on and off.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
To remove the wiper blades, the wiper arms must be moved to
the change wiper service position. The change wiper service po‐
sition is selected using vehicle infotainment system. Refer to the
Owner's Manual.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
ri
♦ Front Passenger Windshield Wiper
Motor Control Module tho
u
a
J584s
DTC Recognition and Display
The wiper motor control module is equipped with on-board diag‐
nostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
54
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.2
Windshield Washer System
Note
♦ An output diagnostic test on the -J519- can be used to check
the windshield washer system function.
Refer to Self Study Program No.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
DTC Recognition and Display
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
270; The
ut Phaeton.
ra
a
c
s
s
un
le
♦ Additional information:
To diagnose, use guided fault finding in the -VAS5051B- .
1.3
Headlamp Washer System
Note
An output diagnostic test on the Vehicle Electrical System Control
Module - J519- can be used to check the headlamp washer sys‐
tem function.
Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component loca‐
tions
Refer to the Owner's Manual
r
fo
ng
For every operation of windshield washer system for the wind‐
shield, headlamps are also washed if windshield wiper lever is
pulled toward steering wheel for at least 1.5 seconds - as long as
low beam or high beam headlamps are switched on.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
After assembly work or when first operating headlamp cleaning
system, it must be ventilated to ensure proper function. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
General Description
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
The vehicle electrical system control module is equipped with On
Board Diagnostics (OBD), which assists troubleshooting.
DTC Recognition and Display
Vehicle electrical system control module is equipped with On
Board Diagnostics (OBD) which assists in troubleshooting.
To diagnose, use guided fault finding in the -VAS5051B- .
Note
♦ The spray nozzles are actuated electrically by lift cylinders.
♦ When operating the headlamp washer system, the headlamps
are not cleaned simultaneously, but sequentially.
1.4
Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding
After assembly work or when first operating, headlamp cleaning
system must be ventilated to ensure proper function.
– Fill tank for window washer system and headlamp cleaning
system.
– Start the engine.
– Switch the headlamps to ON.
1. General Information
55
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Operate headlamp cleaning system several times (3-5 impul‐
ses for every 3 second period).
– If necessary, repeat this bleeding procedure until proper func‐
tion of lift cylinders and spray jets is obtained.
1.5
Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the repair manual. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General In‐
formation; Rep. Gr. 92 ; General Information .
1.6
Hoses, Repairing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
r
fo
ng
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
56
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the repair manual. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General In‐
formation; Rep. Gr. 92 ; General Information .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2
Description and Operation
⇒ “2.1 Windshield Wiper System Overview”, page 57
⇒ “2.2 Windshield Wiper Blades, Adjusting Park Position”,
page 58
⇒ “2.3 Windshield Washer System Overview”, page 58
⇒ “2.4 Headlamp Washer System Overview”, page 60
⇒ “2.5 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Over‐
view”, page 61
2.1
Windshield Wiper System Overview
olkswagen AG
en AG. V
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
wag
1 - Joint-Free Wiper Blades
olks
yV
b
❑ Removing and instal‐
ed
ris
ling. Refer to
ho
t
au
⇒ “4.2 Joint-Free Wiper
ss
Blades”, page 70
❑ Wiper blade park posi‐
tion, adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Windshield Wiper
Blades, Adjusting Park
Position”, page 58
2 - Wiper Arms
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.1.2 Wiper Arms,
Removing”, page 64
3 - Cover Caps
4 - Nut, Wiper Arm to Wiper
Motor Shaft
❑ 20 Nm
❑ M8
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
6 - Bolts, Wiper Frame to Body
❑ 8 Nm
❑ M6
do
c
um
en
5 - Wiper Motor to Wiper
Frame Bolts
❑ 8 Nm
❑ M6
7 - Wiper Frame, Driver Side
❑ Removing. Refer to
⇒ “4.1.5 Left Wiper
Frame, Removing”,
page 65
❑ Installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.1.6 Left Wiper Frame, Installing”, page 66
8 - Nut, Engine Crank to Wiper Motor Shaft
❑ 18 Nm
❑ M8
9 - Wiper Frame, Passenger Side
❑ Removing. Refer to ⇒ “4.1.9 Right Wiper Frame, Removing”, page 68
❑ Installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.1.11 Wiper Motor into Right Wiper Frame, Installing”, page 69
2. Description and Operation
57
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.2
Windshield Wiper Blades, Adjusting
Park Position
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331Note
When the change wiper service setting is ended, the wiper arms
always return to the lower park position. Only in this position is it
possible to correctly adjust the windshield wiper park position!
– Move the wiper arms into the vertical service position. Select
the service position using Infotainment. Refer to the Owner's
Manual.
– Press the Infotainment button again Windshield Wipers in
Service Position .
The wiper arms return to the lower park position.
Volkswag
AG.
agen
en AG
do
es n
ksw
– Now set the park positions of ythe
Vol windshield wiper blades. ot g
Driver side:
– If necessary, adjust the park position by repositioning the wip‐
er arm.
– Tighten the threaded connections to the specifications shown
in the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Windshield Wiper System Overview”, page 57 .
Passenger side:
The distance -A- between the middle of the wiper blade insert and
the lower edge of the windshield must be 5 mm.
– If necessary, adjust the park position by repositioning the wip‐
er arm.
AG.
58
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
2.3
Windshield Washer System Overview
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Tighten the threaded connections to the specifications shown
in the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Windshield Wiper System Overview”, page 57 .
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
The distance -A- between the middle of the wiper blade insert and
the lower edge of the windshield must be 5 mm.
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
ua
ran
tee
b
ed
ris
o
h
t
au
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Right Spray Nozzle for
Windshield Washer System
❑ Only the height is ad‐
justable
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Spray Nozzles for
Windshield Washer
System”, page 75
❑ Spray jets for front wind‐
shield washer system,
checking. Refer to
⇒ “3.2 Spray Jets for
Front Windshield Wash‐
er System, Checking”,
page 62
2 - T-Connection
❑ Connection at spray
nozzle for windshield
washer system, right
❑ Allocation of washer flu‐
id line to windshield
spray nozzles
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
3 - Left Spray Nozzle for Wind‐
shield Washer System
❑ Only the height is ad‐
justable
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Spray Nozzles for
Windshield Washer
System”, page 75
❑ Spray jets for front wind‐
AG. Volkswagen AG d
shield washer system,
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
checking
y
b
ara
d
nte
⇒ “3.2 Spray Jets for rise
o
eo
h
t
Front Windshield Wash‐
u
ra
a
c
s
er System, Checking”,
page
62
s
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
5 - Hose
❑ Hose repair. Refer to ⇒ “1.6 Hoses, Repairing”, page 56
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
4 - Angle Coupling
❑ Connection at spray nozzle for windshield washer system, left
❑ Washer hose couplings, overview. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections”, page 56
6 - Washer Fluid Reservoir
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Overview”, page 61
❑ M6 bolts, reservoir to body, 8 Nm
7 - Angle Coupling
❑ Connection on Windshield Washer Pump - V5❑ Washer hose couplings, overview ⇒ “1.5 Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections”, page 56
8 - Windshield Washer Pump - V5❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.6 Windshield Washer Pump”, page 74
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.7 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor G33 ”, page 75
2. Description and Operation
59
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
10 - Filler Tube for Tank for Windshield Washer System and Headlamp Cleaning System
❑ Removing and installing filler tube. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Filler Neck”, page 74 .
❑ M6 x 15 bolts, filler tube to body, 8 Nm
11 - Connecting Piece
❑ Separating point, engine compartment wiring harness to engine hood wiring harness
❑ Washer hose couplings, overview. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections”, page 56
2.4
Headlamp Washer System Overview
1 - Y-Connection
❑ Divides washer fluid line
to spray nozzles of
headlamp cleaning sys‐
tem
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
5 - Lift Cylinder for Right Wash
❑ Washer jet telescopic cylinder, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.10 Spray Jet Telescoping Cylinder”, page 76
❑ Washer jet retainer, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.11 Spray Nozzle Holder”, page 77
❑ Check and adjust spray nozzles. Refer to ⇒ “3.3 Spray Nozzles, Checking and Adjusting”, page 62 .
❑ M5 x 16 bolt, washer jet telescopic cylinder to the guide, 2 Nm
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
6 - Angle Coupling
❑ Connection to lift cylinder for right spray nozzle
❑ Washer hose couplings, overview. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections”, page 56
60
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
4 - Hose
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
3 - Lift Cylinder for Left Wash
❑ Washer jet telescopic
cylinder, removing and
installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.10 Spray Jet Tele‐
scoping Cylinder”,
page 76
❑ Washer jet retainer, re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “4.11 Spray Nozzle
Holder”, page 77
❑ Check and adjust spray
nozzles. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Spray Nozzles,
Checking and Adjust‐
ing”, page 62 .
❑ M5 x 16 bolt, washer jet
telescopic cylinder to
the guide, 2 Nm
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
2 - Angle Coupling
❑ Connection to lift cylin‐
der for left spray nozzle
❑ Washer hose couplings,
overview. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 Washer Fluid
Line Hose Connec‐
tions”, page 56
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
7 - Washer Fluid Reservoir
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Overview”, page 61
8 - Angle Coupling
❑ Connection at pump for headlamp washer system
❑ Washer hose couplings, overview. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Washer Fluid Line Hose Connections”, page 56
9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.7 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor G33 ”, page 75
10 - Headlamp Washer Pump - V11❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.9 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 ”, page 76
11 - Filler Tube for Tank for Windshield Washer System and Headlamp Cleaning System
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Filler Neck”, page 74
2.5
Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid
Reservoir Overview
Tank for windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning sys‐
tem is in two parts.
1 - Filler tube for tank for windshield washer system and headlamp
cleaning system
2 - Washer fluid reservoir
Tank for windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning sys‐
tem, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir”, page
73 .
n AG. Volkswagen A
c
ss
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
G do
agewindshield washer
es n
w
Filler tube for tank
for
system
and headlamp
ot g
olks
V
y
uto
cleaning system,
removing and installing. Refer
b
ara
d
e
nte
⇒ “4.5 Windshield
and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir
Filler
ris
eo
ho
t
Neck”,aupage 74 .
ra
2. Description and Operation
61
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
3
Diagnosis and Testing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oe
w
olks
V
⇒ “3.1 Rain/Light RecognitionedSensor
G397 ”, page 62
by
ris
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
⇒ “3.3 Spray Nozzles, Checking and Adjusting”, page 62
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
3.1
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
thoWindshield Washer System,
⇒ “3.2 Spray Jets for Front
au
s
ing”, page 62
s
s no
t gu
ara
nte
eo
Check‐
ra
c
⇒ “3.1.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor G397 , Checking”, page
62
⇒ “3.1.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor G397 , Coding”,
page 62
3.1.1
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- ,
Checking
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- ,
Coding
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Code the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
AG.
3.2
Spray Jets for Front Windshield Washer
System, Checking
Note
In the event contamination in spray jet produces an uneven spray
pattern, remove spray jet and rinse it with water in the opposite
direction of spray. It is permissible to further blow through in op‐
posite direction of spray with compressed air. Do not use solid
objects to clean the spray nozzles! Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Spray Nozzles for Windshield Washer System”,
page 75
Adjusting the spray nozzles: Refer to ⇒ Maintenance Procedures;
Rep. Gr. 03 .
3.3
Spray Nozzles, Checking and Adjusting
Refer to ⇒ Maintenance Procedures; Rep. Gr. 03
62
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
3.1.2
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Check the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4
Removal and Installation
⇒ “4.1 Windshield Wiper System”, page 63
⇒ “4.2 Joint-Free Wiper Blades”, page 70
⇒ “4.3 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor G397 ”, page 71
⇒ “4.4 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir”, page
73
⇒ “4.5 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir Filler
Neck”, page 74
AG. Volkswagen
ot g
o
yV
d b Washer Fluid Level Sensor G33 ”,uapage
ran
e
Windshield
75
tee
ris
ho
t
o
ra
au Nozzles for Windshield Washer System”,
Spray
c
ss
n
age
⇒ “4.6 Windshield Washer
Pump”,
page 74AG does n
lksw
⇒ “4.7
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
⇒ “4.8
page 75
pe
rm
itte
d
⇒ “4.9 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 ”, page 76
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
⇒ “4.10 Spray Jet Telescoping Cylinder”, page 76
⇒ “4.11 Spray Nozzle Holder”, page 77
4.1
Windshield Wiper System
⇒ “4.1.1 Windshield Wiper System, Removing”, page 63
⇒ “4.1.2 Wiper Arms, Removing”, page 64
⇒ “4.1.3 Plenum Chamber Cover, Removing”, page 65
⇒ “4.1.4 Cowl, Removing”, page 65
⇒ “4.1.5 Left Wiper Frame, Removing”, page 65
⇒ “4.1.6 Left Wiper Frame, Installing”, page 66
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
⇒ “4.1.8 Wiper Motor into Left Wiper Frame. Installing”,
page 67
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “4.1.9 Right Wiper Frame, Removing”, page 68
do
c
um
en
⇒ “4.1.7 Wiper Motor from Left Wiper Frame, Removing”,
page 67
⇒ “4.1.10 Wiper Motor from Right Wiper Frame, Removing”, page
68
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
⇒ “4.1.11 Wiper Motor into Right Wiper Frame, Installing”,
page 69
4.1.1
Windshield Wiper System, Removing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331/♦ Puller - T10369– Let wiper run to end position.
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Note
In order to remove the wiper frame with linkage and wiper motor,
the wiper arms, plenum chamber cover and cowl trim must be
removed.
4. Removal and Installation
63
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.1.2
Wiper Arms, Removing
Note
The following illustrations show the removal of the driver side
wiper arm. Removal of the passenger side wiper arm is similar.
– Pry off black caps -arrows- using a screwdriver.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Slide the arms of the -T10369/1- -2- under the wiper arm -4as shown in the illustration.
Caution
The windshield wiper shaft can be damaged.
Always use the thrust piece -3- to loosen the wiper arm.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
AG.
64
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Remove the puller and the wiper arm.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Turn the pressure bolt -1- on the puller clockwise until the
thrust piece -3- makes contact with the wiper shaft. Using a 6
mm socket head wrench, rotate the pressure bolt -1- on the
puller clockwise until the wiper arm -4- is released from the
shaft.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
– Remove nut M8
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
-arrow-.
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.1.3
Plenum Chamber Cover, Removing
– Turn the plenum chamber cover locks -arrows- 90°.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
4.1.4
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Cowl, Removing
– Starting at the side, unclip the cowl trim upward from the win‐
dow frame -arrows-.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Left Wiper Frame, Removing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.1.5
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
– Remove the cover.
Windshield wiper system, passenger side, removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.1.9 Right Wiper Frame, Removing”, page 68 .
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Remove M6 mounting bolts -arrows- and remove washers.
– Disconnect both connectors -arrows-.
– Pull the left wiper frame outward slightly.
4. Removal and Installation
65
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Pull off the multi-pin connector -arrow- from the wiper motor.
– Remove the left wiper frame from the vehicle.
4.1.6
Left Wiper Frame, Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Check the wiper arm for ease of movement.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
area,s it may result in the
Note
Procedure when mounting the wiper arm.
– Move the windshield wiper into the service position.
– Bring the wiper into a -40° position- from the wiper rest posi‐
tion.
There must be at least 4 mm between the windshield and the
wiper arm spring -arrows-.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
AG.
66
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
If there is not enough clearance, proceed as follows.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Check wiper arm for ease of movement.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
If there are slight differences in the body
wiper arm scratching the windshield. If the wiper retaining bracket
has slid in the z direction, it may result in the wiper arm spring
making contact with the windshield.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Correct the height using the wiper console left mounting
bolt
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
and corrosion-protected washers -arrow-.
ksw
not
l
o
V
ss
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Note
by
ed
ris
o
th
au
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
Make sure the window is not pulled into the bushing, but rather
lies on it.
4.1.7
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
– Check the clearance again.
Wiper Motor from Left Wiper Frame, Re‐
moving
– Remove the M8 nut -arrow-.
– Remove crank.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Wiper Motor into Left Wiper Frame. In‐
stalling
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.1.8
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Remove M6 bolts and remove wiper motor.
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331– Place wiper motor into wiper frame and fasten it with bolts.
– Tighten all the threaded connections to the specification given
in the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Windshield Wiper System Overview”, page 57 .
Note
♦ Every 2nd time it is switched off, the wiper motor runs past end
position and up a little (can be seen by driveshaft changing
direction of rotation) into an under stroke end position. This
ensures that the lip of the wiper blade is positioned in the other
direction. This function is called APS (alternating park posi‐
tion). This end position is not to be used to align the wiper
crank. The end position where the wiper blade runs directly
into end position without over stroke must be used. Activate
the one-touch wiping function again if necessary.
♦ Use a new motor crank when replacing motor.
4. Removal and Installation
67
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Place crank onto wiper motor shaft as shown in illustration.
– Align the crank to -dimension a-.
Dimension -a- to stop: 5.0 ± 0.6 mm
– Secure crank and wiper motor shaft with nut -arrow-.
– Tighten all the threaded connections to the specification given
in the assembly overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Windshield Wiper System Overview”, page 57 .
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
4.1.9
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Right Wiper Frame, Removing
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Remove M6 mounting bolts -arrows- and remove washers.
– Pull right wiper frame outward slightly.
– Pull off connector at wiper motor.
– Remove right wiper frame from the vehicle.
– Remove M6 bolts and remove wiper motor.
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
AG.
68
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Remove crank.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove nut M8 -arrow-.
do
c
um
en
Wiper Motor from Right Wiper Frame,
Removing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.1.10
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.1.11
Wiper Motor into Right Wiper Frame, In‐
stalling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331– Place wiper motor into wiper frame and fasten it with bolts.
– Tighten all the threaded connections to the specification given
in the overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Windshield Wiper System Overview”, page 57 .
Note
♦ Every 2nd time it is switched off, the wiper motor runs past end
position and up a little (can be seen by driveshaft changing
direction of rotation) into an under stroke end position. This
ensures that the lip of the wiper blade is positioned in the other
direction. This function is called APS (alternating park posi‐
tion). This end position is not to be used to align the wiper
agen AGruns directly
Volkswblade
AG.wiper
crank. The end position where
the
does
agen
ksw stroke must be used.
not
l
into end position without
over
Activate
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d function again if necessary.
the one-touch wiping
e
n
is
tee
or
ac
r
ho
pe
rm
itte
d
ss
– Place crank onto wiper motor shaft as shown in illustration.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Align the crank to -dimension a-.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
t
♦ Use a new motor
au crank when replacing motor.
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Dimension -a- to stop: 3.1 ± 0.6 mm
4. Removal and Installation
69
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Secure crank and wiper motor shaft with nut -arrow-.
– Tighten all the threaded connections to the specification given
in the overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Windshield Wiper System Overview”, page 57 .
Installing
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
kswSequence”,
not
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
page 15 .
d
e
n
is
or
tee
or
ac
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
th
– Let wiper motors run to park position.
Plug in the wiper motor
au
s
connectors and operate wiperss with ignition switched on.
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Install the left and right wiper frames, the cowl trim and the
plenum chamber cover in reverse order of removal.
Note
♦ The following illustration shows the installation of the driver
side wiper arm. Installation of the passenger side wiper arm is
similar.
♦ Tighten the nuts of the wiper arms to tightening specification,
only after the wiper blade park position has been adjusted.
Prote
cted
by
Joint-Free Wiper Blades
Removing
Note
♦ Right and left wiper blades may not be interchanged during
installation.
♦ Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Grasp wiper
blades only in area of wiper blade mount to lift them off the
windshield.
70
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
AG.
4.2
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Adjust the windshield wiper blade park position. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Windshield Wiper Blades, Adjusting Park Position”,
page 58 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
do
c
um
en
– Place the wiper arms onto the shafts in the approximate park
position and tighten the nuts -arrow- by hand.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Move the wiper arms into the vertical service position. Select
the service position using Infotainment. Refer to the Owner's
Manual.
– Fold the wiper arm upward, holding the wiper blade where it
is connected to the wiper arm.
Thereby, any unwanted bending of the wiper arm and blade is
prevented.
– Fold the wiper blade up to the limit stop.
– Take off wiper blade.
Installing
– Slide wiper blade onto axle of wiper arm.
– Fold back wiper blade then fold wiper arm back to windshield.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
ran
ed
s
i
tee
Joint-free windshield wipers are verythflexible.
Grasp wiper blades
or
or
only in the area of the wiper blades mount.
ac
au
s
Note
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
The wiper arms will go back into their park position.
4.3
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397-
The rain/light recognition sensor is designed so that it can be used
again. The only requirement to use it again is that the connecting
pad must not be damaged.
Caution
♦ Danger of getting dirty.
♦ The connecting pad can be destroyed by dirt.
Prote
cted
by
Rain sensors cannot be interchanged. Be sure to use the correct
rain sensor. Refer to the Electronic Parts Catalog.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Note
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
♦ Prior to reuse, ensure the rain/light recognition sensor is
stored in a dust-free area, and that the silicone connecting
pad is not dirty.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
– Press the Infotainment button again Windshield Wiper in
Service Position .
AG.
DTC Recognition and Display
The rain/light recognition sensor is equipped with OBD, which
assists in troubleshooting.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
4. Removal and Installation
71
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove interior mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ;
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
Removal and Installation .
e
wage
s no
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ks
Vol
pe
rm
itte
d
Note
t
au
ss
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
by
– Disconnect the connector -1- from the
ed rain/light recognition
s
i
r
sensor -2- and open the clips -arrows-.
ho
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
The clip does not have to be removed from the rain sensor, con‐
trary to the illustration.
– Pry the rain/light recognition sensor -1- with a suitable screw‐
driver at the cut-out -3- from the retaining plate -2-.
Note
AG.
♦ Always clean the windshield surface inside the rain/light
recognition sensor bracket before installing. Remove any
traces of the connecting pad still remaining on the wind‐
shield.
♦ Surface (connecting pads) of rain/light recognition sensor
must not be contaminated or damaged when installing.
Always replace a sensor that has a damaged connecting
pad.
– Clean windshield inside retaining plate, cleaning solution. Re‐
fer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove the cap from the new rain/light recognition sensor.
72
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Caution
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
While removing, the complete rain/light recognition sensor and
not only the upper shell of the sensor must be pried off.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Insert the rain/light recognition sensor -1- into the retaining
plate -2- on the windshield and press it in securely.
Note
Even if the sensor is installed correctly, small air bubbles can form
between the windshield and the connecting pad. The contact sur‐
face must be free-of-bubbles after approximately 10 minutes.
– Compress both springs at the same time and connect the con‐
nector.
– Install the interior rearview mirror ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
68 ; Removal and Installation .
– If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- was replaced,
perform coding. Refer to
⇒ “3.1.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor G397 , Coding”, page
62 .
4.4
Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid
Reservoir
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
AG. Volkswagen
gen
swa
k
– Remove right front wheel housing liner. Referyto
Vol⇒ Body Ex‐
db .
e
terior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Removal and Installation
ris
tho
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
au to ⇒ Body Exterior;
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer
ss
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation
.
AG do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
pe
rm
itte
d
– Remove the hose connections -3- from the pumps and catch
the washer fluid in an appropriate container.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Disconnect the connectors -4- from the pumps and windshield
washer fluid level sensor.
– Remove the breather line -2- next to the fill tube support.
– Remove bolt -1-.
– Remvoe the bolt -arrow A- for the reservoir in the wheel hous‐
ing.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
do
c
um
en
– Remove the bolts -arrows B- and carefully pull the reservoir
downward and away from the fill tube.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
4. Removal and Installation
73
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
n AG. Volkswagen AG
Electrical Equipment
wag-e Edition 03.2016 doe
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
– Tighten all the threaded connections to the specification given
in the overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Windshield Washer System Overview”, page 58 .
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
4.5
Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid
Reservoir Filler Neck
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331– Before the fill tube can be removed, the right headlamp must
be removed.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove the upper bolt of the fill tube -arrow-.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Headlamps, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Remove the lower bolt of the filler pipe -arrow-.
– Remove the bolts from the coolant reservoir.
– Set the reservoir aside with the lines attached.
– Remove the fill tube.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Tighten all the threaded connections to the specification given
in the overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Windshield Washer System Overview”, page 58 .
4.6
Windshield Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump - V5- is attached to reservoir for wind‐
shield and headlamp washer systems in right wheel housing.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
74
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Removing
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
– Bleed headlamp washer system after completing assembly
work. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
s no
ks
t gu
Vol
by
ara
d
e
nte
The hose connections
-3and
the
pump
connections
are
color
s
ri
o
eo
h
t not be interchanged when being installed.
coded and must
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove the hose connection -2- from the washer pump and
catch the washer fluid in an appropriate container.
– Separate the connector -1- from the washer pump.
– Pull the pump upward out of the reservoir for the windshield
and headlamp washer systems.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Bleed headlamp washer system after completing assembly
work. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55 .
4.7
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor
- G33-
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove Windshield Washer Pump - V5- -1-. Refer to
⇒ “4.6 Windshield Washer Pump”, page 74 .
– Remove Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- -3-. Refer to
⇒ “4.9 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 ”, page 76 .
– Separate windshield washer fluid
level sensor -2- and pull it
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
from its rubber seal. olkswage
o
yV
db
ise
r
tho
au
Installing
Spray Nozzles for Windshield Washer
System
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– To remove, press on the left side of the nozzle. This com‐
presses the expansion spring, allowing the nozzle to be moved
forward and out of the engine hood.
– Pull hose from spray nozzle and separate the 2-pin connector.
Installing
– To install, attach the hose and the 2-pin connector for the noz‐
zle heater.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Check spray nozzles. Refer to
⇒ “3.2 Spray Jets for Front Windshield Washer System,
Checking”, page 62 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Slide spray jet into installation opening until it engages.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
4.8
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
– Bleed headlamp washer system after completing assembly
work. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Install in reverse
order of removal, note the following:
ss
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
4. Removal and Installation
75
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.9
Headlamp Washer Pump - V11-
The headlamp washer system pump is attached to the reservoir
for the windshield and headlamp washer systems in the right
wheel housing.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove the hose connection -2- from the pump and catch the
washer fluid in an appropriate container.
– Separate the connector -1- from the pump.
– Pull the pump upward out of the reservoir for the windshield
and headlamp washer systems.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Bleed headlamp washer system after completing assembly
work . Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55 .
4.10
Spray Jet Telescoping Cylinder
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
k
l
ot g
Vo
y
db
ua
ran
tee
th
au
ss
or
ac
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
ise
– Remove bolts -arrows- for the crossmember.
or
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
76
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Remove crossmember bolts -arrows- and pull out crossmem‐
ber.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove mounting bolt -arrow- at lift cylinder.
– Push retaining clip from lift cylinder upward -arrows-.
– Remove lift cylinder.
– Hold locking clip pressed -arrow- at hose coupling and pull
hose from cylinder.
– Unlock connector at lift cylinder and pull off connector.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
– Tighten all the threaded connections to thesspecification
given
c
sa
Installing
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
in the overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Headlamp Washer System Overview”, page 60 .
4.11
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Bleed headlamp washer system after completing assembly
work. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55 .
Spray Nozzle Holder
Note
The following illustration shows the removal of the spray nozzle
holder with the bumper cover removed. The spray nozzle holder
can also be removed and installed with the bumper cover instal‐
led.
Removing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Carefully open the cover for the spray nozzle holder in the
bumper cover up to the stop.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
4. Removal and Installation
77
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Carefully remove spray nozzle holder -arrow-.
– Raise clip -arrow- slightly using a small screwdriver.
– Pull out washer nozzle bracket. Turn the spray nozzle holder
inside the lift cylinder carefully back the forth at the same time.
Installing
– Slide spray nozzle bracket in telescopic cylinder catches.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
inserting
spray
nozzle
bracket,
make
sure
it
is
positioned
s
s
AG.
Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
78
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Bleed headlamp washer system after completing assembly
work. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Washer System, Bleeding”, page 55 .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
When
properly in relation to headlamp. The guides on the sides of the
spray nozzle holder -arrows- must be pushed into the slots on the
lift cylinder.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5
Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
♦ Puller - T10369-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
do
c
um
en
5. Special Tools
79
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
94 –
Exterior Lights, Switches
1
General Information
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 80
⇒ “1.3 HID Headlamp”, page 83
⇒ “1.2 HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Swivel Module Position
Sensor”, page 83
⇒ “1.4 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs”, page 84
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp”, page 84
⇒ “1.6 Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor”, page 86
⇒ “1.7 HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Daytime Running Lamp
and Parking Lamp LED Module ”, page 86
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
⇒ “1.8 Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid”, page 86d by V
ara
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
⇒ “1.9 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control”,
ut
ra
a
c
page 86
s
s
⇒ “1.11 Turn Signal and Entry Lamp in Exterior Mirror”,
page 87
⇒ “1.12 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Dynamic
Cornering Lamp Motor”, page 87
⇒ “1.13 License Plate Light X ”, page 88
⇒ “1.14 LED Tail Lamps”, page 88
⇒ “1.15 High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 89
⇒ “1.16 Steering Column Switch”, page 89
⇒ “1.17 Access/Start Authorization”, page 89
⇒ “1.18 Parking Aid”, page 91
⇒ “1.19 Lane Change Assistance Control Module with Radar
Sensor”, page 92
⇒ “1.21 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera”, page 93
⇒ “1.24 Tire Pressure Monitoring Antennas R207 ”, page 95
1.1
HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Pre‐
cautions
WARNING
♦ Never replace lamps when you are not familiar with the
corresponding actions, safety precautions and tools.
– Note the following whenever working on HID headlamps:
♦ Notes on hazardous high voltage / currents ⇒ page 81
80
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
⇒ “1.23 Transmitters Inside Wheel Housing”, page 95
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “1.22 Tire Pressure Monitoring System from 2007”, page 94
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
⇒ “1.20 Rearview Camera System, Rear Assist”, page 93
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
⇒ “1.10 Daytime Running Lamp and Parking Lamp LED Module”,
page 87
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
♦ Notes on pressure, temperature and radiation / electric arc
⇒ page 81
♦ Assembly notes for HID lamps ⇒ page 82
♦ Disposal regulations for HID lamps ⇒ page 83
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Protective eyewear
♦ Gloves
Notes on Hazardous High Voltage / Currents
WARNING
Light system control modules, connectors or components in
the bulb socket area conduct dangerous high voltage
The control module and igniter may be used only on the bulb.
WARNING
•
Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and
remove ignition key.
•
When working on headlamp system, ensure all compo‐
nents are without voltage, including relieving residual volt‐
age after switching headlamps off.
•
Residual voltages are discharged by switching low beam
on and off again after ignition key was removed.
•
Make sure lamps cannot be switched on when working on
headlamp system.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
Notes on Pressure, Temperature and Radiation/Glare
agen
oe
WARNING
s
w
olks
yV
b
ed
ris
ho
t
au
s no
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
♦ The glass can explode and there is a danger of burning.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
♦ When removing and installing HID bulbs, always wear
safety glasses and gloves.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
♦ There are pressures from 7 sbar (cold) to 100 bar (hot) in
the glass portion of the HID bulb. The hot glass of the bulb
can reach temperatures of up to 700 degrees Celsius.
1. General Information
81
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
WARNING
•
Lamp must only be operated in headlamp housing (pro‐
tection against contact because of hot lamp, absorption of
ultraviolet radiation, avoiding danger of glare, explosion
protection).
•
Glass cones of bulbs can become very hot - danger of
burns!
•
Avoid looking directly into light beam, since UV radiation
of the HID lamp is approximately 2.5 times higher than that
of standard Halogen lamps.
•
Avoid looking into light beam (danger of glare); vision can
be impaired for a longer period of time.
WARNING
•
Avoid contact with burst glass cone.
•
H7 bulbs and HID bulbs (Xenon / Bi-Xenon) are under
pressure and can burst when replaced - danger of injury!
•
When removing and installing HID bulbs, always wear
safety glasses and gloves.
Assembly Notes on HID Lamps
Caution
♦ Before replacing a bulb, the corresponding electrical con‐
sumer must always be switched off.
♦ Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and
remove ignition key.
AG. Volkswagen A
n
wage
G do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ks
♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers,
Vol use
by
d
ewould evap‐
clean cloth gloves. The remaining fingerprint
ris
orate due to the heat of the operated bulb
thoand condense
u
a
on the reflector which would impair headlamp
luminosity.
ss
♦ A bulb must only be replaced with one of the same version.
Bulb identification can be found on bulb socket or glass
cone.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
82
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
♦ Harness connectors must engage correctly when installed
and must be checked for proper connection.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Disposal Regulations for HID Lamps
WARNING
•
HID lamps must be disposed of as hazardous waste, nev‐
er dispose of HID lamps via domestic waste.
•
HID lamps contain metallic mercury (Hg) and traces of
thallium, they must not be destroyed.
•
These components must be returned for proper recycling
in accordance with national legislation.
•
Dispose of only in the designated containers at the re‐
sponsible collection point.
1.2
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Swiv‐
el Module Position Sensor
Left Swivel Module Position Sensor - G474- and Right Swivel
Module Position Sensor - G475- are located inside the headlamp
and cannot be replaced or adjusted separately.
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
WARNINGss
c
HID Headlamp
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
There are different headlamp versions installed in the Phaeton.
♦ HID headlamp bulb for low beam and HB 3-bulb for high beam.
Refer to ⇒ “5.1 HID Headlamp”, page 147 .
♦ HID headlamp bulb for low beam and HID bulb for high beam.
Refer to ⇒ “5.2 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs”, page 157 .
♦ Headlamps with a “Bi-Xenon” HID bulb for high and low beam
and dynamic and static cornering lamps. Refer to
⇒ “5.3 HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp (AFS), Vehicles
through 05/31/2010, through MY 2011”, page 167 .
Note
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
working on headlamps.
♦ The headlamp range control utilizes on-board diagnostics.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Always switch off headlamps and remove ignition key before
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
1.3
agen
lksw
Vo
by
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the lighting sys‐
AG.
tem is essential in the event of customer complaints.
DTC Recognition and Display
The automatic headlamp range control is equipped with on-board
diagnostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
1. General Information
83
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.4
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
lksw
There are different headlamp versionsVoinstalled
in the Phaeton.
♦
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
♦ Headlamps with a Bi-Xenon HID bulb for high and low beam
and dynamic and static cornering lamps. Refer to
⇒ “5.3 HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp (AFS), Vehicles
through 05/31/2010, through MY 2011”, page 167 .
♦ Always switch off headlamps and remove ignition key before
working on headlamps.
♦ The headlamp range control utilizes on-board diagnostics.
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the lighting sys‐
tem is essential in the event of customer complaints.
DTC Recognition and Display
The automatic headlamp range control is equipped with on-board
diagnostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
AG.
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Prote
cted
by
1.5
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
There are different headlamp versions installed in the Phaeton.
♦ HID headlamp bulb for low beam and HB 3-bulb for high beam.
Refer to ⇒ “5.1 HID Headlamp”, page 147 .
♦ HID headlamp bulb for low beam and HID bulb for high beam.
Refer to ⇒ “5.2 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs”, page 157 .
♦ Headlamps with a Bi-Xenon HID bulb for high and low beam
and dynamic and static cornering lamps.
84
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
♦ HID headlamp bulb for low beam and HID bulb for high beam.
Refer to ⇒ “5.2 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs”, page 157 .
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
by
ed
ris and HB 3-bulb for high beam.
HID headlamp bulb for low beam
o
th
Refer to ⇒ “5.1 HID Headlamp”,
page 147 .
au
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Note
♦ Before working on HID headlamps and cornering lamps, al‐
ways switch off headlamps and remove ignition key.
♦ Automatic headlamp range control and cornering light in HID
headlamps have On Board Diagnostics (OBD).
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the lighting sys‐
tem is essential in the event of customer complaints.
♦ Additional information:
Owner's Manual
⇒ Self Study Program No. 891303 ; The Phaeton
⇒ Self Study Program No. 893303 ; Phaeton - chassis
⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component locations
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
General Description:
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
⇒ Self Study Program No. 899303 ; Phaeton - air suspension
with controlled damping
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
r aElectrical
a
c
s
s
Headlamps with HID lamps and cornering lamps (AFS = Adaptive
Front lighting System) have Bi-Xenon function.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Gas discharge lamps generate only the low beam headlamp in
standard Xenon headlamps. Bi-Xenon allows one gas-discharge
lamp to generate low beam and high beam headlamp. For this
purpose, an electro-mechanical adjuster ( Left Headlamp Reflec‐
tor Adjustment Solenoid - N395- and Right Headlamp Reflector
Adjustment Solenoid - N396- ) opens the dimmed region of low
beam headlamp when high beam is operated and a high beam
light emission results.
For this reason, the high beam is also adjusted automatically with
the low beam on Bi-Xenon headlamps.
Headlamps with HID lamps and a cornering lamp do not have
auxiliary high beams.
The cornering lamps system has the following functions:
♦ Swiveling low beams and high beams (dynamic cornering
light) at vehicle speeds above 10 Kmh and steering angle
steer.
♦ Cornering lamp (static cornering lamp) at sharp curves (curve
radius < 500 m) or on turning-off and vehicles speeds below
50 Kmh
DTC Recognition and Display
The automatic headlamp range control, cornering lamps and ve‐
hicle electrical system control module are equipped with On
Board Diagnostic (OBD) which assists troubleshooting of head‐
lamps with HID lamps and cornering lamps.
To diagnose, use guided fault finding in the -VAS5051B- .
Note
Malfunction of the range control or AFS system are displayed in
the instrument cluster with the lamp failure indicator lamp.
1. General Information
85
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.6
Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor
Volkswa
gen AG
en AG. - V318Left Adaptive Cornering Lamp
and dRight
oes Adaptive
wagMotor
not
olks is located inside the headlamp
Cornering Lamp Motorb-y VV319and
gu
ara
d
cannot be disassembled.
nte
ir se
tho
eo
un
le
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Day‐
time Running Lamp and Parking Lamp
LED Module
The Left Daytime Running Lamp And Parking Lamp Led Module
- L176- and the Right LED Daytime Running Lamp And Parking
Lamp LED Module - L177- are located inside the headlamp and
cannot be replaced individually.
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
1.8
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Sole‐
noid
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control
AG.
Prote
cted
by
1.9
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
Gas discharge lamps generate only the low beam headlamp in
standard Xenon headlamps. Bi-Xenon allows one gas-discharge
lamp to generate low beam and high beam headlamp. For this
purpose, an electro-mechanical adjuster ( Left Headlamp Reflec‐
tor Adjustment Solenoid - N395- and Right Headlamp Reflector
Adjustment Solenoid - N396- ) opens the dimmed region of low
beam headlamp when high beam is operated and a high beam
light emission results.
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Note
♦ Before working on HID headlamps and dynamic high beam
control, always switch off headlamps and remove ignition key.
♦ Automatic headlamp range control of HID headlamps with
cornering lamps has On Board Diagnostics (OBD).
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the lighting sys‐
tem is essential in the event of customer complaints.
♦ Additional information:
Owner's Manual
⇒ Self Study Program No. 891303 ; The Phaeton
⇒ Self Study Program No. 899303 ; Phaeton - air suspension
with controlled damping
⇒ Self Study Program No. 893303 ; Phaeton - chassis
⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component locations
86
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
1.7
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
au the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer r ac
If a failure occurs,
ss
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
For this reason, the high beam is also adjusted automatically with
the low beam on “Bi-Xenon” headlamps.
DTC Recognition and Display
The automatic headlamp range control, cornering lamps, dynam‐
ic high beam and vehicle electrical system control module are
equipped with On Board Diagnostic (OBD) which assists trouble‐
shooting of headlamps with HID lamps and cornering lamps.
To diagnose, use guided fault finding in the -VAS5051B- .
Note
A malfunction in the range control or in the variable front lighting
will be displayed in the instrument cluster by the lamp failure in‐
dicator lamp.
1.10
Daytime Running Lamp and Parking
Lamp LED Module
The Left Daytime Running Lamp And Parking Lamp LED Module
- L176- and the Right LED Daytime Running Lamp And Parking
genheadlamp
. Volkswathe
Lamp LED Module - L177- are located
and
AG do
n AGinside
es n
wage
s
k
l
cannot be replaced individually.
ot g
Vo
y
db
ua
r
an
se
If a failure occurs, theorientire
headlamp must be replaced. Refer
tee
h
t
or
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”,
page 167 .
a
au
In addition, there is one entry lamp each in exterior mirror housing
which illuminates the dark entry area around opened driver and
front passenger door.
1 - Exterior Mirror Entry Lamps
2 - Turn signal inside the exterior mirror
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control Dynamic Cornering Lamp
Motor
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
1.12
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors are installed inside the
housing.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Turn Signal and Entry Lamp in Exterior
Mirror
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1.11
ss
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Left Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V318- and Right Adaptive
Cornering Lamp Motor - V319- is located inside the headlamp and
cannot be disassembled.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced, Refer
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
1. General Information
87
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.13
License Plate Light - X-
The four license plate lamp bulbs inside the rear bumper cover
on the Phaeton illuminate the license plate as well as the sur‐
rounding area around the back of the vehicle via the coming
home/leaving home function.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
s
i
r
The tail lamps, except for the back-up lamp, cannot
be
disas‐
o
eo
th
ubulb,
ra
sembled. The back-up lighting is provided by a
which
can
a
c
s
s is provided by
be replaced separately. The remaining lighting
LED Tail Lamps
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
1.14
LEDs. Malfunctioning LEDs cannot be replaced.
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
The OBD for all the tail lamps is performed via the Comfort Sys‐
tem Central Control Module - J393- . Tail lamp faults are stored
in the DTC memory.
♦ Taillamp LED failure (not USA and Canada):
♦ Individual LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) in LED tail lamp as‐
semblies (tail, turn signal, brake and backup lamps) are com‐
bined in groups of up to four LEDs each and are supplied with
power as a group.
♦ LED tail lamp assemblies are constructed in such a way that
when one LED group fails as a function (for example brake
lamp), the requirements of ECE regulations (Economic Com‐
mission for Europe) are still met.
♦ When one LED group fails, the function of the intact LEDs are
are faulty (Repair Procedure).
DTC Recognition and Display
The comfort system central control module is equipped with onboard diagnostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
88
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
♦ Replace the entire LED tail lamp assembly if more than 4 LEDs
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
given a higher load, by which failure of other LED groups can
be assumed in the near future.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
ments are no longer met.
do
c
um
en
♦ If another LED group fails functionally, these legal require‐
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.15
High-Mounted Brake Lamp
Note
♦ LED failure in the high-mounted brake lamp (not USA and
Canada):
♦ Individual LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) in high-mounted brake
lights are combined into groups of up to four LEDs and are
supplied with power as a group.
AG. Volkswagen A
gen
swa
G do
es
k
not
♦ The auxiliary brake light is constructed
in such a way that when
Vol
gu
by
un
le
ara
nte
e
longer met.
pe
rm
itte
d
♦ If another LED group fails, these legal requirements are no
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
load, by which failure of other LED groups can be assumed in
the near future.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
♦ When one LED group fails, the intact LEDs are given a higher
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ed
one LED group fails (e.g.risbrake
lamp), the requirements of
ho
ECE regulations (Economic
Commission for Europe) are still
t
u
a
met.
ss
♦ If more than four individual LEDs have failed in the high-moun‐
ted brake lamp, the high-mounted brake lamp must be re‐
placed (repair measure).
1.16
Steering Column Switch
Note
♦ The steering column electronic systems control module uti‐
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the steering col‐
umn switch is essential when addressing complaints.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
DTC Recognition and Display
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ For additional information: Owner's manual.
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
lizes on-board diagnostics.
Prote
cted
by
The steering column electronic systems control module is equip‐
ped with on-board diagnostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
AG.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
1.17
Access/Start Authorization
Caution
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always per‐
form the work procedure as described in the repair manual.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
1. General Information
89
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Note
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the access/start
authorization system is essential when addressing com‐
plaints.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operation instructions ⇒ Self Study
Program No. 896303 ; The Phaeton; Convenience and Safety
Electronics .
DTC Recognition and Display
The access/start authorization system is equipped with on-board
diagnostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
Emergency Release
olkswagen AG
In this vehicle, the ignition keyglock
re‐
. Velectro-mechanically
AGis
does
a en
leased.
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
a
y
db
ra
e
It is not possible to
tee
risremove the key as long as the ignition isnstill
o
h
t
or
switched on and
a
au the selector lever is not in the P position.
un
le
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
– Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
– Depress the push-button -arrow- with a screwdriver and hold.
– The ignition key may now be removed.
Access/Start Authorization Switch
The Access/Start Authorization Switch - E415- (ignition switch)
has an electronic lock actuator.
All faults related to the access/start authorization switch (ignition
switch) are transmitted by the Access/Start Control Module J518- .
Access/Start Authorization Button
Access/Start Authorization Control Module
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
DTC Recognition and Display:
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
The Access/Start Authorization Button - E408- allows the vehicle
to be started without actively using the ignition key.
Access/start control module is equipped with On Board Diagnos‐
tics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
90
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
If the voltage supply in the vehicle has been interrupted, the ig‐
nition key can be removed by actuating the emergency release.
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
The ignition key lock assures that the ignition key is not acciden‐
tally removed.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.18
Parking Aid
Note
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the parking aid is
essential when addressing customer complaints.
♦ Additional information. Refer to Operation instructions and/or
Self Study Program 896303 The Phaeton; Convenience and
Safety Electronics.
DTC Recognition and Display
The parking aid system is equipped with On Board Diagnostic
(OBD) capabilities which assists in troubleshooting.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
w
olks
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
yV
The parking aid system assists the customerd bwhile
parking, by
isevisually, according to
signaling to the customer both audibly and
r
o
h
ut object in front of or be‐
the distance between the vehicle and aan
ss
hind the vehicle.
pe
rm
itte
d
The parking aid system consists of the following components:
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
♦ Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
♦ Right Front Parking Aid Sensor - G252♦ Right Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G253♦ Right Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor - G333♦ Left Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor - G332♦ Left Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G254♦ Left Front Parking Aid Sensor - G255♦ Left Rear Parking Aid Sensor - G203♦ Left Rear Center Parking Aid Sensor - G204♦ Right Rear Inner Parking Assistance Sensor - G335♦ Right Rear Center Parking Aid Sensor - G205-
♦ Rear Parking Aid Display - Y15-
AG.
♦ Right Front Parking Aid Display - Y14-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ Left Front Parking Aid Display - Y13-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Right Rear Parking Aid Sensor - G206-
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Left Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor - G334-
♦ Parking Aid Button - E266♦ Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15- , quantity: 2
♦ Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22-
1. General Information
91
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
Note
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
Lane Change Assistance Control Mod‐
ule with Radar Sensor
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1.19
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
Phaeton 2003 ➤
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
Electrical Equipment - uEdition
03.2016
th
ra
a
c
s
s
♦ Before troubleshooting or servicing, the technicians must be
familiar with the function and operation of the lane change as‐
sist.
♦ For additional information. Refer to Operating Instructions.
General Description
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
DTC Recognition and Display
The lane change assist system is equipped with On Board Diag‐
nostic (OBD) capabilities which assists in troubleshooting.
To diagnose, use guided fault finding in the -VAS5051B- .
Perform output Diagnostic Test Mode (DTM) to test the entire lane
change assist system. Refer to
⇒ “4.26.5 Lane Change Assistance Control Module Output Di‐
agnostic Test Mode”, page 138 .
Lane Change Assist Components
♦ Lane Change Assistance Control Module - J769- with radar
sensor behind bumper cover in rear of vehicle
♦ Lane Change Assistance Control Module 2 - J770- with radar
sensor behind bumper cover in rear of vehicle
♦ Lane Change Assistance Warning Lamp In Driver Exterior
Rearview Mirror - K233♦ Lane Change Assistance Warning Lamp In Front Passenger
Exterior Rearview Mirror - K234-
92
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
There is a button in the turn signal lever and a display in the in‐
strument cluster for using the lane change assist. While driving,
important information is shown in the instrument cluster display.
do
c
um
en
The lane change assist supports the driver with the help of radar
sensors in the rear bumper cover that monitor the blind angle and
traffic behind the vehicle. Displays that inform the driver in two
levels if lane change assist has detected a vehicle on that side
and if it deems the vehicle critical for a lane change are installed
on the inner side of the exterior mirror housing. In the information
stage, the displays in the exterior mirrors light up and inform the
driver that the lane change assist has detected a vehicle on that
side and deems it critical to a lane change. If the turn signal is
activated during the information stage, lane change assistance
switches to the warning stage and respective display in the exte‐
rior mirror blinks rapidly and brightly.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.20
Rearview Camera System, Rear Assist
Note
♦
♦ When performing service work or fault-finding, use ⇒ -
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
VAS5051B- or -VAS5052- in the function guided fault finding ,
⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Component locations.
♦ When the battery is connected, check the all the vehicle ac‐
cessories (radio, clock, electronic conveniences, etc.) accord‐
ing to the repair manual and/or the Owner's Manual.
The rear system assists the driver during back-up driving by pro‐
viding the driver with an image of the traffic situation behind the
vehicle via the monitor of the radio or radio navigation system.
The system is optional equipment and can only be installed to‐
gether with the RNS 810 radio/navigation system.
The system switches itself on by selecting the reverse driving
gear, even when the radio or radio/navigation system is switched
off.
The rear view camera system consists of the following compo‐
nents:
♦ The Rear View Camera - R189- ,
AG.
Prote
cted
by
DTC Recognition and Display
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
♦ The Radio/Navigation Display Control Module - J503- ,
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ The Rear View Camera System Control Module - J772- ,
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
♦ For additional information. Refer to Operating Instructions.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
Before troubleshooting or servicing,
ir se the technicians must be
tee
o
h
t
or
familiar with the function andau operation of the rear system.
ac
ss
Rear view camera system is equipped with On Board Diagnostic
(OBD).
When performing fault-finding, use -VAS5051B- or -VAS5052- in
guided fault finding function.
1.21
Driver Assistance Systems Front Cam‐
era
The Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera - R242- is installed
under a cover on the interior rearview mirror.
The driver assistance systems front camera supports several
driver assistance programs such as traffic sign recognition or high
beam control.
1. General Information
93
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.22
Tire Pressure Monitoring System from
2007
Note
pe
rm
itte
d
♦ Additional information. Refer to Operation instructions ⇒ Self
If the vehicle has the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), the
tire valves on the four wheels have a sensor installed in them.
These sensors measure the tire pressure and the temperature
inside the tires and send this information through a transmitter
inside the wheel housing by a signal to the Tire Pressure Moni‐
toring Antennas - R207- . The antenna then sends the actual tire
pressures to the TPMS control module, which then compares
these pressures with the specified pressures and will display a
tire pressure loss in the instrument cluster if there are any differ‐
ences.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
♦ Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Module - J502♦ Right Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor - G223Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
♦ Right Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor - G225agen
lksw
Vo
by
♦ Left Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G431-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Left Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor - G224-
AG.
♦ Right Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G432♦ Left Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G433♦ Right Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G434♦ Tire Pressure Monitoring Antennas - R207Note
♦ The system switches on automatically whenever the vehicle
is moving as soon as it receives a signal from a wheel sensor.
It is not possible to switch off the system as long the wheels
have the wheel sensors installed in them.
♦ If the system does not recognize any sensors after a few mi‐
nutes of driving, it will shut off by itself.
94
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Left Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor - G222-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Study Program No. 896303 ; The Phaeton; Convenience and
Safety Electronics .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
♦
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ar
d
e
Before troubleshooting
is or servicing, the technicians must beante
r
o
eo
h
familiar with theafunction
and operation of the tire pressure
ut
ra
c
s
monitoring system.
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.23
Transmitters Inside Wheel Housing
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) have a
transmitter -2- in each wheel housing. This transmitter requests
the tire pressure sensors in the tire valves to send the actual tire
pressure. These values are received by the Tire Pressure Moni‐
toring Antennas - R207- and then transmitted to the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Control Module - J502-
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
r
fo
ng
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
The tire pressure monitoring antenna receives the actual meas‐
urements from the tire pressure sensors and sends them to the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Module - J502- . The tire pres‐
sure monitoring antenna -2- is attached to the spare wheel from
underneath.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
un
le
Tire Pressure Monitoring Antennas R207-
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1.24
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
agen
lksw
Vo
by
1. General Information
95
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Description and Operation
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
⇒ “2.1 HID Headlamp, Vehicles from 05/31/2010, through MY
2011”, page 96
⇒ “2.2 HID Headlamp Overview”, page 99
⇒ “2.3 HID Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 101
⇒ “2.4 Headlamp with Two HID Bulbs Overview”, page 101
⇒ “2.5 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs, Adjusting”, page 103
⇒ “2.6 HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp Overview”,
page 103
⇒ “2.7 HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp, Adjusting”, page 105
⇒ “2.8 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Over‐
view”, page 106
⇒ “2.9 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Head‐
lamp, Adjusting”, page 107
AG.
⇒ “2.12 Fog Lamps, Adjusting”, page 108
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “2.11 Swivel Module Position Sensor”, page 108
Prote
cted
by
⇒ “2.13 Side Panel LED Tail Lamps Overview”, page 108
⇒ “2.14 Rear Lid Tail Lamps Overview”, page 110
⇒ “2.15 Steering Column Switch Overview”, page 110
⇒ “2.16 Steering Column Switch Connector Assignments”,
page 112
⇒ “2.17 Access/Start Authorization Button E408 , Pin Assign‐
ment”, page 114
⇒ “2.18 Access/Start Authorization Antennas Overview”,
page 114
⇒ “2.19 Parking Aid Overview”, page 117
⇒ “2.20 Rear View Camera System Overview”, page 119
⇒ “2.21 Tire Pressure Sensors”, page 119
2.1
HID Headlamp, Vehicles from
05/31/2010, through MY 2011
⇒ “2.1.1 General Description”, page 96
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Headlamps”, page 97
2.1.1
General Description
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for HID headlamp bulbs. Refer to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
The HID headlamp comes in the following versions:
♦ HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp
♦ HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control
96
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
⇒ “2.10 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Head‐
lamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid”, page 108
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
2
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
Vo
y
ua
b
Phaeton 2003 ➤ ed
ran
ir s
tee
o
Electrical Equipment
- Edition 03.2016
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Both headlamp versions differ only in the inner construction.
Note
♦ Before working on HID headlamps and dynamic high beam
control, always switch off headlamps and remove ignition key.
♦ Automatic headlamp range control of HID headlamps with
cornering lamps has On Board Diagnostics (OBD).
♦ Familiarity with the function and operation of the lighting sys‐
tem is required if there are customer concerns.
♦ Additional information:
Refer to the Owner's Manual.
Refer to Self Study Program 270 The Phaeton.
Refer to Self Study Program 275 The Phaeton - Air Suspension
with Controlled Damping.
n AG. Volkswagen A
ge
swa
k
Vol - Chassis.
Refer to Self Study Program 277 Phaeton
by
d
ise
r
Refer to Self Study Program 335
tho Cornering Lamp System .
au
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Malfunction Recognition and Malfunction Indicator
The automatic headlamp range control, cornering lamps, dynam‐
ic high beam and vehicle electrical system control module are
equipped with On Board Diagnostic (OBD) which assists trouble‐
shooting of headlamps with HID lamps and cornering lamps.
Use the “Guided Fault Finding” in the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester
to troubleshoot.
Note
The “lamp failure” indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will in‐
dicate if there is a malfunction in the headlamp range control or
the variable front lighting.
Overview - Headlamps
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
2.1.2
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
For this reason, the high beam is also adjusted automatically with
the low beam on “Bi-Xenon” headlamps.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting
& Component locations
G do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
2. Description and Operation
97
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Cornering Lamp and Head‐
lamp Range Control Module J745❑ Removing and Instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.13 Cornering
Lamp and Headlamp
Range Control Module
J745 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 201 .
2 - Bolt
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
3 - Housing Cover
4 - Left/Right Turn Signal Con‐
trol Module
❑ Removing and Instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.12 Turn Signal
Control Module, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 201 .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
do
c
um
en
7 - Bolt
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
6 - Housing Cover
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
5 - Right/Left Daytime Running
Lamp and Position Lamp Con‐
trol Module -J860- / - J861❑ Left Daytime Running
Lamp and Position
Lamp Control Module J860❑ Right Daytime Running
Lamp and Position
Lamp Control Module J861❑ Removing and Instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.9 Left/Right Day‐
time Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing and Installing”,
page 198 .
8 - Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Module -J667- / -J668❑ Left Headlamp Power Output Module - J667❑ Right Headlamp Power Output Module - J668❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.11 Left and Right Headlamp Power Output Module J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing”, page
200 .
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
98
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
10 - Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module -J343- / -J344❑ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343❑ Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
9 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.10 Left and Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing”,
page 199 .
11 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
12 - Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor -V48- / -V49❑ Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48❑ Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.5 Left and Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing”,
page 194 .
13 - Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb -L13- / -L14❑ Left HID Headlamp Bulb - L13❑ Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.6 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing”, page 196 .
14 - Headlamps
❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
❑ Installation position, correcting. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.3 Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting”, page 193 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ “5.5.2 Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 193 .
15 - Lifter
❑ On body bracket
16 - Bolt
❑ 6 Nm
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
a
ksw
17 - Bolt
Vol
by
d
❑ 6 rNm
ise
ho
t
❑ au Quantity: 3
ss
19 - Adjusting Mechanism
❑ For headlamp adjustment
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
18 - Banjo Bolt
❑ Quantity: 3
20 - Bolt
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
2.2
HID Headlamp Overview
Note
do
c
um
en
Check for possible influences upon the headlamp adjustment,
check the adjustment itself, and if needed, adjust the headlamps.
Refer to ⇒ Maintenance Procedures; Rep. Gr. 03 .
2. Description and Operation
99
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Bolt
❑ 6 Nm
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
3 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”,
page 147
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
100
do
c
um
en
5 - Screws
❑ For Left Headlamp
Range Control Module J567- or Right Head‐
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
4 - Left Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J567- or Right
Headlamp Range Control
Module - J568❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.7 Headlamp
Range Control Module”,
page 155
❑ Headlamp range control
module, coding. Refer
to
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp
Range Control Module,
Coding”, page 123 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2 - Left Low Beam Headlamp
Bulb - M29- or Right Low Beam
Headlamp Bulb - M31❑ Type D1S, 35W
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.2 Low Beam
Gas-Discharge Bulb”,
page 149
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
lamp Range Control
Module - J5686 - Adjustment Mechanism for Headlamp Range Control
7 - Screws
❑ For headlamp range control adjustment mechanism
8 - Adjustment Bushings
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
❑ Correcting installation position
of headlamp. Refer to
yV
ua
b
d of HID Headlamp, Correcting”, page
r123
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position
an .
e
is
tee
or
ac
r
ho
ut
a
ss
10 - Turn Signal Bulb Socket
11 - Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5- or Right Front Turn Signal Bulb - M7❑ 12V, H 21 W bulb
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.1.5 Turn Signal Bulb”, page 152
12 - Left Side Marker Lamp Bulb - M1- or Right Side Marker Lamp Bulb - M3❑ 12V, W5 W bulb, Xenon blue
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.1.4 Parking Lamp Bulb”, page 151
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
9 - Bolts
❑ 6 Nm
13 - Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M30- or Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M32❑ HB 3 12V, 60W bulb
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.1.3 High Beam Light Bulb”, page 150
14 - Cap
HID Headlamp, Adjusting
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
2.3
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
16 - Cap
do
c
um
en
15 - Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- or Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.1.6 Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor”, page 153
HID headlamps, adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance Procedures;
Rep. Gr. 03 .
AG.
2.4
Headlamp with Two HID Bulbs Over‐
view
Note
Check for possible influences upon the headlamp adjustment,
check the adjustment itself, and if needed, adjust the headlamps.
Refer to ⇒ Maintenance Procedures; Rep. Gr. 03 .
2. Description and Operation
101
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Screws
❑ For left headlamp range
control module - J567or right headlamp range
control module - J5682 - Left Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J567- or Right
Headlamp Range Control
Module - J568❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.7 Headlamp
Range Control Module”,
page 164
3 - Screws
❑ For the low beam con‐
trol module bracket
4 - Console for Low Beam
Headlamp Control Module
5 - Left Low Beam Headlamp
Bulb - M29- or Right Low Beam
Headlamp Bulb - M31❑ Type D1S, 35W
❑ Replacing. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.2 Low Beam
Gas-Discharge Bulb”,
page 158
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
102
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
6 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”,
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
page 157
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
Phaeton
2003 ➤
h
t
or
u
ac
a
Electrical Equipment - Edition
03.2016
ss
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
7 - Left HID Headlamp High Beam Control Module - J683- or right Right HID Headlamp High Beam Control
Module - J684❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.2.8 HID Lamp High Beam Control Module”, page 165
8 - Screws
❑ For the Left HID headlamp high beam control module or Right HID headlamp high beam control module
9 - Adjustment Mechanism for Headlamp Range Control
10 - Screws
❑ For headlamp range control adjustment mechanism
11 - Adjustment Bushing
❑ Correcting installation position of headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”, page 123
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
14 - Turn Signal Bulb Socket
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
13 - Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5- or Right Front Turn Signal Bulb - M7❑ 12V, H 21 W bulb
❑ Replacing. Refer to ⇒ “5.2.5 Turn Signal Bulb”, page 163
do
c
um
en
12 - Screws
❑ 6 Nm
15 - Left Side Marker Lamp Bulb - M1- or Right Side Marker Lamp Bulb - M3❑ 12V, W 5W bulb, Xenon blue
❑ Replacing. Refer to ⇒ “5.2.4 Parking Lamp Bulb”, page 162
16 - Bulb Socket for Parking Lamp Bulb
17 - Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M30- or Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M32❑ Type D1S, 35W
❑ Replacing. Refer to ⇒ “5.2.3 High Beam Gas-Discharge Bulb”, page 161
18 - Cap
19 - Bolt
❑ 6 Nm
2.5
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs, Adjust‐
ing
Headlamp with two HID headlamps, adjusting: ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet ; Work Description .
2.6
HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp
Overview
Note
Check for possible influences upon the headlamp adjustment,
check the adjustment itself, and if needed, adjust the headlamps.
Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
2. Description and Operation
103
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Left Front Turn Signal Bulb
- M5- or Right Front Turn Sig‐
nal Bulb - M7❑ PY 12V, 21W bulb
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.4 Turn Signal
Bulb, Replacing”,
page 172
2 - Turn Signal Bulb Socket
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
104
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
4 - Left Daytime Running Lamp
and Parking Lamp Control
Module - J860- and Right Day‐
time Running Lamp and Park‐
ing Lamp Control Module J861❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.5 Daytime Run‐
ning Lamp and Parking
Lamp Control Module”,
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
3 - Left Cornering Lamp Bulb L148- or Right Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L149❑ H7 12V, 55W
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.3 Cornering
Lamp Bulb, Static Cor‐
nering Lamp”,
page 171
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
page 173
5 - Cap
6 - Bolt and Cap
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
7 - Cap HID Bulb
8 - Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.9 Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor”, page 177
9 - Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343- and Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.6 HID Headlamp Control Module”, page 174
10 - Bolt, HID Bulb Control Module
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
11 - Bolts, Headlamp Power Output Stage
AG. Volkswagen AG d
❑ 2 Nm
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
❑ Quantity: 4
d
e
nte
is
or
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
14 - Bolt, Headlamp Range Control Module
❑ 3 Nm
❑ 4.2 x 16
❑ Quantity: 2
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
13 - Left HID Headlamp Bulb - L13- and Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14❑ Type D1S, 12V 35W
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.2 Bulb”, page 169
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
eo
th
12 - Left Headlamp Power
r a Output Stage - J668au Output Stage - J667- or Right Headlamp Power
c
s
s
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.7 Headlamp Power Output Stages”, page 175
15 - Headlamp Range Control Module - J431❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.8 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 ”, page 176
❑ Coding control module for headlamp range control. Refer to
⇒ “4.2 Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”, page 123 .
16 - Bolts
❑ 6 Nm
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
agen
lksw
Vo
by
19 - Bolts
❑ For headlamp range control adjustment mechanism
❑ Quantity: 3
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
18 - Adjustment Mechanism for Headlamp Range Control
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
17 - Adjustment Bushings
❑ Correcting installation position of headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”, page 123
AG.
20 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167
2.7
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp, Ad‐
justing
Adjusting the HID headlamp and cornering lamps. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
2. Description and Operation
105
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.8
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control Overview
Note
Check for possible influences upon the headlamp adjustment,
check the adjustment itself, and if needed, adjust the headlamps.
Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1 - Left Front Turn Signal Bulb
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
- M5- or Right Front Turn Sig‐
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
nal Bulb - M7ara
d
e
nte
is
r
eo
❑ PY 12V, 21W bulb utho
ra
a
c
s
s
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.4 Turn Signal
Bulb, Replacing”,
page 172
2 - Turn Signal Bulb Socket
3 - Left Cornering Lamp Bulb L148- or Right Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L149❑ H7 12V, 55W
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.3 Cornering
Lamp Bulb, Static Cor‐
nering Lamp”,
page 171
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
106
do
c
um
en
4 - Left Daytime Running Lamp
and Parking Lamp Control
Module - J860- and Right Day‐
time Running Lamp and Park‐
ing Lamp Control Module J861❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.5 Daytime Run‐
ning Lamp and Parking
Lamp Control Module”,
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
page 173
5 - Cap
6 - Bolt and Cap
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
7 - Cap HID Bulb
8 - Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.9 Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor”, page 177
9 - Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343- and Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.6 HID Headlamp Control Module”, page 174
10 - Bolt, HID Bulb Control Module
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
11 - Bolts, Headlamp Power Output Stage
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
12 - Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667- or Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.7 Headlamp Power Output Stages”, page 175
13 - Left HID Headlamp Bulb - L13- and Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14❑ Type D1S, 12V 35W
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.2 Bulb”, page 169
14 - Bolt, Headlamp Range Control Module
❑ 3 Nm
❑ 4.2 x 16
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
❑ Quantity: 2 lkswagen
n
ot g
u
o
yV
16 - Bolts
❑ 6 Nm
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
17 - Adjustment Bushings
❑ Correcting installation position of headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”, page 123
18 - Adjustment Mechanism for Headlamp Range Control
19 - Bolts
❑ For headlamp range control adjustment mechanism
❑ Quantity: 3
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control Headlamp, Adjusting
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
2.9
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
20 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Adjusting the HID headlamp and cornering lamps. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
b
ara
ed Range Control Module - J43115 - Headlamp
nte
ris
o
eo
h
ut
❑ Removing
and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.3.8 Headlamp
r a Range Control Module J431 ”, page 176
a
c
s
s
❑ Coding control module for headlamp range control. Refer to
⇒ “4.2 Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”, page 123 .
2. Description and Operation
107
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control Headlamp Reflector Ad‐
justment Solenoid
un
le
2.10
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
2.11
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Gas discharge lamps generate only the low beam headlamp in
standard Xenon headlamps. Bi-Xenon allows one gas-discharge
lamp to generate low beam and high beam headlamp. For this
purpose, an electro-mechanical adjuster ( Left Headlamp Reflec‐
tor Adjustment Solenoid - N395- and Right Headlamp Reflector
Adjustment Solenoid - N396- ) opens the dimmed region of low
beam headlamp when high beam is operated and a high beam
light emission results.
Swivel Module Position Sensor
Left Swivel Module Position Sensor - G474- and Right Swivel
Module Position Sensor - G475- are located inside the headlamp
and cannot be replaced or adjusted separately.
Fog Lamps, Adjusting
Side Panel LED Tail Lamps Overview
AG.
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
108
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
2.13
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Adjust the fog lamps. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
do
c
um
en
2.12
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Bolts
❑ 4 Nm
2 - Connector
❑ For tail lamp assembly
inside the side panel
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
3 - Tail Lamps in Side Panel
❑ The self-adhesive seal
is to be replaced when
removing and installing.
The seal can be ordered
from the Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.10.1 Side Panel
LED Tail Lamps”,
page 206
❑ Gap dimensions. Refer
to
⇒ “3.1 Tail Lamp Gap
Dimensions”,
page 120 .
2. Description and Operation
109
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.14
Rear Lid Tail Lamps Overview
1 - Nuts
❑ 4 Nm
2 - Connector
❑ For tail light assembly in
rear lid
3 - Lock Washers
4 - Screws
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
does
not
❑ For left back-up lamp - Volkswa
gu
y
ara
M16- bulb holder anded b
nte
s
i
r
bulb
o
eo
h
t
au
ra
c
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
5 - Bulb Holder for Back-Up
Light
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
6 - Left Back-Up Light - M16❑ 12V, PH 16 W
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.10.3 Rear Lid Tail
Lamps”, page 208
8 - Divider
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
AG.
Prote
cted
by
2.15
Steering Column Switch Overview
Note
♦ The following components of the steering column switch can‐
not be disassembled:
♦ Left trim of steering column switch -3-.
♦ Steering Wheel Tiptronic Switch - E389- , left -4-.
♦ Bracket -5-.
♦ Bracket -7-.
♦ Multi-pin connector for steering wheel tiptronic switch -8-.
♦ Bracket -9-.
♦ Steering wheel tiptronic switch , right -10-.
♦ Right trim of steering column switch-11- .
110
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
9 - Threaded Studs
❑ On the rear lid tail lamp
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
7 - Tail Lamp Assembly in Rear
Lid
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.10.2 Rear Lid Tail
Lamps”, page 207
❑ Gap dimensions. Refer
to
⇒ “3.1 Tail Lamp Gap
Dimensions”,
page 120 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
1 - Steering Column Electron‐
ics Control Module - J527❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “6.1 Steering Column
Switch”, page 230
❑ Steering Column Elec‐
tronic Systems Control
Module - J527- , coding.
Refer to
⇒ “4.15 Steering Col‐
umn Electronic Systems gen AG. Volkswagen AG d
a
oes
ksw
not
Control Module, Cod‐
Vol
gu
y
b
ara
ing”, page 126 . ed
nte
ris
o
eo
h
❑ Steering column
switch,
t
u
ra
a
c
pin assignment.
Refer to
ss
⇒ “2.16 Steering Col‐
umn Switch Connector
Assignments”,
page 112 .
2 - Steering Column
3 - Left Trim of Steering Col‐
umn Switch
❑ at Steering Wheel Tip‐
tronic Switch - E389- ,
left
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4 - Steering Wheel Tiptronic
Switch - E389❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “6.1 Steering Column
Switch”, page 230
❑ Steering column switch,
pin assignment. Refer to
⇒ “2.16 Steering Col‐
umn Switch Connector
2. Description and Operation
111
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Assignments”,
page 112 .
5 - Bracket
❑ At steering wheel tiptronic switch, left
6 - Torx bolt
❑ For fastening steering wheel tiptronic switch, left and right
7 - Bracket
❑ For multi-pin connector for tiptronic switch and multi-pin connector for spiral spring
8 - Multi-Pin Connector for Steering Wheel Tiptronic Switch - E389❑ Pin assignment. Refer to ⇒ “2.16 Steering Column Switch Connector Assignments”, page 112 .
9 - Bracket
❑ At steering wheel tiptronic switch -E389- , right
10 - Steering Wheel Tiptronic Switch - E389- , Right
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “6.1 Steering Column Switch”, page 230
❑ Steering column switch, pin assignment. Refer to
⇒ “2.16 Steering Column Switch Connector Assignments”, page 112 .
11 - Right Trim of Steering Column Switch
12 - TORX® Bolt
❑ For fastening steering wheel tiptronic switch, left and right
13 - Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “6.1
Steering
Switch”, page 230
. VolkswagColumn
en AG
n AG
does
wage
s
k
not
l
❑ Steering column switch, pin assignment.
Refer to
Vo
gu
by
a112
d
ran .
⇒ “2.16 Steering Column isSwitch
Connector
Assignments”,
page
e
t
r
tho
ee
o
15 - Socket Head Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ For fastening steering column switch
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ra
14 - Airbag Spiral Spring/Return
Spring with Slip Ring - F138- and Steering Angle
Sensor - G85au
c
ss
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “6.1 Steering Column Switch”, page 230
16 - Turn Signal Switch - E2❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “6.1 Steering Column Switch”, page 230
❑ Steering column switch, pin assignment. Refer to
⇒ “2.16 Steering Column Switch Connector Assignments”, page 112 .
2.16
Steering Column Switch Connector As‐
signments
I - Multi-pin connector for the power easy entry -I-. Refer to
⇒ “2.16.1 I - 4-Pin Connector”, page 113 .
- III - Multi-pin connector -III- for spiral spring. Refer to
⇒ “2.16.3 III - 4-Pin Connector”, page 113 .
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
- IV - Multi-pin connector -IV- for voltage supply, CAN and terminal
15. Refer to ⇒ “2.16.4 IV - 16-Pin Connector”, page 114 .
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
112
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
- II - Multi-pin connector -II- for the tiptronic switch. Refer to
⇒ “2.16.2 II - 5-Pin Connector”, page 113 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.16.1
I - 4-Pin Connector
1 - Electrical easy entry on/off
2 - Direction selection
3 - Terminal 31, negative
4 - Not assigned
2.16.2
II - 5-Pin Connector
1 - Terminal 31, negative
2 - Up (upshift)
3 - Down (downshift)
4 - Not assigned
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
2.16.3
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
5 - Not assigned
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
III - 4-Pin Connector
3 - Spiral spring connection
4 - Spiral spring connection
5 - Spiral spring connection
6 - Spiral spring connection
do
c
um
en
2. Description and Operation
113
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.16.4
IV - 16-Pin Connector
1 - Terminal 31, negative
2 - Terminal 30, positive
3 - Powertrain CAN-Bus,
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
4 - Not assigned
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
shielding
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
6 - Not assigned
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
7 - Not assigned
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
5 - CCS switch setting “Off”
8 - Comfort CAN-Bus Low
9 - Comfort CAN-Bus High
10 - Powertrain CAN-Bus, High
11 - Powertrain CAN-Bus, Low
12 - Not assigned
13 - Terminal 15
Access/Start Authorization Button E408- , Pin Assignment
AG.
1 - Switch contact 2
agen
lksw
Vo
by
12-pin Connector
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
2.17
2 - Solenoid for key lock
3 - Voltage supply, negative
4 - Anti-theft immobilizer, shift lock
5 - Switch contact 1
6 - Switch contact 6
7 - Switch contact 3
8 - Immobilizer, Data 2
9 - Voltage supply, positive
10 - Switch contact 5
11 - Switch contact 4
12 - Immobilizer, Data 1
2.18
114
Access/Start Authorization Antennas Overview
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
16 - Not assigned
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
15 - Not assigned
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
14 - Not assigned
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1 - Front Passenger Access/
Start Authorization Antenna R135❑ Exterior antenna
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.21 Front Passen‐
ger Access/Start Au‐
thorization Antenna”,
page 217
❑ Adapting the antenna
parameter. Refer to
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Param‐
eter, Access/Start Au‐
thorization Antennas,
Adapting”, page 129
r
fo
ng
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
2 - Access/Start Authorization
Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior R139AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
❑ Interior antenna
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
❑ Removing
and
instal‐
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
ling.
Refer to
a
c
s
s⇒ “5.25 Access/Start
Authorization Antenna 2
in Vehicle Interior”, page
219
❑ Adapting the antenna
parameter. Refer to
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Param‐
eter, Access/Start Au‐
thorization Antennas,
2. Description and Operation
115
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Adapting”, page 129
3 - Access/Start Authorization Antenna in Luggage Compartment - R137❑ Interior antenna
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.23 Luggage Compartment Access/Start Authorization Antenna”, page 218
❑ 4.0 x 14 mm bolts - 2 Nm
❑ Adapting the antenna parameter. Refer to
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Parameter, Access/Start Authorization Antennas, Adapting”, page 129
4 - Access/Start Authorization Antenna in Rear Bumper - R136❑ Exterior antenna
❑ Antenna has two parts
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.22 Access/Start Authorization Antenna in Rear Bumper R136 ”, page 217
❑ 5 x 16 mm bolts - 2 Nm
❑ Adapting the antenna parameter. Refer to
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Parameter, Access/Start Authorization Antennas, Adapting”, page 129
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
5 - Driver Access/Start Authorization Antenna - R134AG. Volkswagen AG d
❑ Exterior antenna
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.20 Driver
byAccess/Start Authorization Antenna”,
ara page 217
d
e
nte
is
r
❑ Adapting the antenna parameter. Refer to tho
eo
u
ra
a
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Parameter, Access/Start
Authorization
Antennas,
Adapting”,
page
129
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
6 - Access/Start Authorization Antenna 3 in Vehicle Interior - R154❑ Interior antenna
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.26 Interior Access/Start Authorization Antenna 3”, page 220
❑ 4 x 16 mm bolts - 2 Nm
❑ Adapting the antenna parameter. Refer to
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Parameter, Access/Start Authorization Antennas, Adapting”, page 129
7 - Access/Start Authorization Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138❑ Interior antenna
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.24 Interior Access/Start Authorization Antenna 1”, page 219
❑ Adapting the antenna parameter. Refer to
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Parameter, Access/Start Authorization Antennas, Adapting”, page 129
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
116
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.19
Parking Aid Overview
1 - Front Parking Aid Sensors
❑ Right Front Parking Aid
Sensor - G252❑ Right Front Center
Parking Aid Sensor G253❑ Right Front Inner Park‐
ing Aid Sensor - G333❑ Left Front Parking Aid
Sensor - G255❑ Left Front Center Park‐
ing Aid Sensor - G254❑ Left Front Inner Parking
Aid Sensor - G332❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.27.2 Front Parking
Aid Sensors”,
page 221
2 - Left front parking aid display
- Y13❑ installed in the front of
the instrument panel on
the left side, under the
windshield
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “5.27.4 Front Parking
Aid Display”, page 222
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
agen
lksw
Vo
by
2. Description and Operation
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
3 - Right Front Parking Aid Dis‐
play - Y14❑ Installed in the front of
the instrument panel on
the right side, under the
windshield
❑ Removing and installing
117
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
⇒ “5.27.4 Front Parking
Aid Display”, page 222
4 - Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15❑ Installed on the C-pillar on the left and right sides
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.27 Parking Aid”, page 221
5 - Rear Parking Aid Display - Y15❑ Installed in the roof trim panel above the rear window
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “5.27.5 Rear Parking Aid Display Y15 ”, page 223
6 - Rear Parking Aid Sensors
❑ Right Rear Parking Aid Sensor - G206❑ Right Rear Center Parking Aid Sensor - G205❑ Right Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor - G335❑ Left Rear Parking Aid Sensor - G203❑ Left Rear Center Parking Aid Sensor - G204❑ Left Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor - G334❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.27.3 Rear Parking Aid Sensors”, page 222
7 - Parking Aid Control Module - J446❑ Installation position beneath rear shelf
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
❑ Removing and installing.
es nParking Aid Control Module J446 ”, page 221
wage Refer to ⇒ “5.27.1
s
k
l
ot g
Vo
y
ua
b
❑ Tighteningespecification:
2 Nm
d
ran
is
or
tee
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
118
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
th
or
8 - Front Parking
Aid Warning Buzzer - H22ac
au
ss
❑ Installed behind the instrument cluster on the left side above the relay carrier
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “5.27.7 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer”, page 224
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.20
Rear View Camera System Overview
1 - Radio/Navigation Display
Unit Control Module - J503❑ Component location: in
the front of the center
console
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Com‐
munication; Rep. Gr.
91 ; Removal and Instal‐
lation
2 - Rearview Camera System
Control Module - J772❑ Component location: in
the luggage compart‐
ment under the rear
shelf
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.30 Rearview Cam‐
era System Control
Module J772 ”,
page 226
2.21
Tire Pressure Sensors
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS),
the tire valves -1- on the four wheels have a sensor -5- installed
in them.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
3 - Rearview Camera - R189❑ Component location: in
the license plate de‐
pression on the rear lid
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.31 Rearview Cam‐
era”, page 227
❑ Rear View Camera Sys‐ agen AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
ksw
tem, Calibrating. Refer
ot g
Vol
ua
by
d
to
ran
e
s
i
tee
r
o
⇒ “4.27.2 Rearview
h
or
ut
ac
a
Camera System,
Cali‐
ss
brating”, page 138
2. Description and Operation
119
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
3
Specifications
⇒ “3.1 Tail Lamp Gap Dimensions”, page 120
3.1
Tail Lamp Gap Dimensions
1 - Gap Dimension
❑ 3.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm
2 - Gap Dimension
❑ 0.5 mm +/- 0.2 mm
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
120
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
3 - Flushness
❑ 0.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4. Diagnosis and Testing
121
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4
Diagnosis and Testing
⇒ “4.1 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Dynamic
Cornering Lamp Motor, Checking”, page 123
⇒ “4.2 Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”, page 123
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”,
page 123
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123
⇒ “4.5 Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor, Checking”, page 124
⇒ “4.7 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs, Correcting Installation
Position”, page 125
⇒ “4.8 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs Range Control Module,
Coding”, page 125
. Volkswagen AG
⇒ “4.9 HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Headlamps, Correcting
gen AG
does
swa
k
not
l
o
Installation Position”, page 125
gu
yV
b
ed
ara
nte
e
s
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
is
⇒ “4.10 HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp SwivelthModule
Position
or
u
a
Sensor, Checking”, page 125
s
⇒ “4.12 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control Head‐
lamps, Correcting Installation Position”, page 126
⇒ “4.13 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 , Coding”,
page 126
⇒ “4.14 Tail Lamps, Checking Function”, page 126
⇒ “4.15 Steering Column Electronic Systems Control Module,
Coding”, page 126
⇒ “4.16 Access/Start Authorization Switch E415 , Checking”,
page 127
⇒ “4.17 Access/Start Authorization Button E408 , Checking”,
page 127
⇒ “4.18 Access/Start Authorization Control Module J518 , Re‐
placing”, page 128
⇒ “4.22 Parking Aid Shut-Off Speed, Adapting”, page 130
⇒ “4.23 Supression Range for Attachments, Adapting”,
page 130
⇒ “4.24 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer Volume, Adapting”,
page 130
⇒ “4.25 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer Volume, Adapting”,
page 131
⇒ “4.26 Lane Change Assist, Side Assist”, page 131
⇒ “4.27 Rearview Camera System, Rear Assist”, page 138
⇒ “4.28 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera R242 ”,
page 143
122
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
⇒ “4.21 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Checking”,
page 129
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “4.20 Antenna Parameter, Access/Start Authorization Anten‐
nas, Adapting”, page 129
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
⇒ “4.19 Access/Start Authorization Control Module J518 , Cod‐
ing”, page 128
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
⇒ “4.11 Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid, Checking”,
page 125
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
⇒ “4.29 Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Module J502 , Coding”,
page 143
4.1
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control Dynamic Cornering Lamp
Motor, Checking
The Left Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V318- and the Right
Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V319- can be checked in the
output diagnostic test mode.
AG. Volkswagen
agen
ksw
Vol
y
b
ed
ris
o
h
t
au
ss
4.2
AG do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
Headlamp Range Control Module, Cod‐
ing
DTC Recognition and Display
The automatic headlamp range control is equipped with on-board
diagnostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information System VAS5051B♦ Diagnostic Cable - VAS 5051/6A-VAS5051B- , connecting. Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Note
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
HID Headlamp Range Control Module,
Coding
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
4.3
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Headlamp range control module, coding. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”,
page 123 .
If the indications described in the work procedure do not appear
on the display: User manual for Vehicle Information, Testing And
Information System - VAS5051BAG.
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦ 01 OBD capable systems
♦ Automatic Headlamp Range Control
♦ Code the automatic headlamp range control functions
4.4
Installation Position of HID Headlamp,
Correcting
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
4. Diagnosis and Testing
123
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment -
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
s
i
r
Edition 03.2016
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
When checking the installation position of the headlamp, if the
gaps between the headlamp and body are uneven, the headlamp
position must be corrected.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Loosen the lower bolt on the headlamp but do not remove it.
– Check headlamp for function.
4.5
Dynamic Cornering Lamp Motor,
Checking
The Left Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V318- and the Right
Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V319- can be checked in the
output diagnostic test mode.
4.6
Swivel Module Position Sensor, Check‐
ing
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding on the -VAS5051B- .
124
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm and check the position of the head‐
lamp making sure the gaps are even. Adjust again if neces‐
sary.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Adjust the gap dimension by turning the adjustment bushing
-arrow- in or out.
do
c
um
en
– Loosen the three front bolts just enough so that the headlamp
can be moved freely in the adjustment bushings.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable
systems
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
Automatic headlamp range controls acornering light
c
s
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦
♦
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
♦ Automatic headlamp range control electrical components
♦ Swivel module position sensor
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs, Cor‐
recting Installation Position
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
4.7
– Correcting installation position of headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123 .
4.8
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs Range
Control Module, Coding
– Headlamp range control module, coding. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”,
page 123 .
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Prote
cted
by
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp Swiv‐
el Module Position Sensor, Checking
AG.
4.10
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Correcting installation position of headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123 .
do
c
um
en
HID Headlamp and Corning Lamp
Headlamps, Correcting Installation Po‐
sition
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.9
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding on the -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Automatic headlamp range control cornering light
♦ Automatic headlamp range control electrical components
♦ Swivel module position sensor
4.11
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Sole‐
noid, Checking
The Left Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N395- and
Left Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N395- can be
checked using Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519Output Diagnostic Test Mode (DTM).
4. Diagnosis and Testing
125
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.12
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control Headlamps, Correcting
Installation Position
– Correcting installation position of headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123 .
4.13
Headlamp Range Control Module J431- , Coding
– Headlamp range control module, coding. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”,
page 123 .
4.14
Tail Lamps, Checking Function
DTC Recognition and Display
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
VAS5051B- .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
The comfort system central control module
by is equipped with onara
d
e
nte
ris
board diagnostics, which simplifieshofault-finding.
eo
ut
ra
a
c
s
To diagnose, use the guided fault
s finding function of the -
Special tools and workshop equipment required
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
♦ Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information System VAS5051B♦ Diagnostic Cable - VAS 5051/6A-VAS5051B- , connecting. Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270
Note
Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
AG.
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Comfort system central control module
♦ Functions
♦ Output Diagnostic Test Mode
4.15
Steering Column Electronic Systems
Control Module, Coding
DTC Recognition and Display
The steering column electronic systems control module is equip‐
ped with on-board diagnostics, which simplifies fault-finding.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the Vehicle
Testing, Measurement, And Information System - VAS5051B- .
126
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
♦ Electrical Equipment
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ Body
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
If the indications described in the work procedure do not appear
on the display: User manual for Vehicle Information, Testing And
Information System - VAS5051B-
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information System VAS5051B♦ Diagnostic Cable - VAS 5051/6A-VAS5051B- , connecting. Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270
Note
If the displays described in the work procedure do not appear on
the display: User manual for -VAS5051B– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Steering wheel electronics
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
module, coding
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
♦ Functions
♦ Control
DTC Recognition and Display:
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding on the -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
♦ Electrical Components
Access/Start Authorization Button E408- , Checking
AG.
4.17
agen
lksw
Vo
by
♦ Access/start authorization switch
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Anti-Theft Immobilizer
do
c
um
en
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Access/start authorization switch is equipped with On Board Di‐
agnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Access/Start Authorization Switch E415- , Checking
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
4.16
DTC recognition and display:
Access/start authorization button - E408- is equipped with On
Board Diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
4. Diagnosis and Testing
127
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the vehicle
testing, measurement, and information system - VAS5051B- .
– Connect the -VAS5051B⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Anti-Theft Immobilizer
♦ Electrical Components
♦ Access/start authorization button
4.18
Access/Start Authorization Control
Module - J518- , Replacing
DTC Recognition and Display
Access/start authorization control module is equipped with On
Board Diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the vehicle
testing, measurement, and information system - VAS5051B- .
Volkswagen AG
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer
AG.to
does
agen
wTesting
s
k
not
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis,
and Information
Systems”,
l
Vo
gu
y
b
ara
page 270 .
d
e
n
is
or
tee
or
ac
th
– Select guided
au fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Anti-theft immobilizer 4 (adaptation)
♦ Functions
♦ 1. Anti-Theft Immobilizer, Adapting
♦ 2. Control module, coding
♦ 3. Adapting the antenna parameter
4.19
Access/Start Authorization Control
Module - J518- , Coding
DTC Recognition and Display
Access/start authorization control module is equipped with On
Board Diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
AG.
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
128
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
♦ Body
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Anti-theft immobilizer 4 (adaptation)
♦ Functions
♦ Control module, coding
4.20
Antenna Parameter, Access/Start Au‐
thorization Antennas, Adaptingagen AG. Volkswagen AG do
ksw
Vol
by
d
e
ris
tho
Access/start authorization antennas areauequipped
with
Diagnostic (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
ss
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
DTC Recognition and Display
On Board
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
pe
rm
itte
d
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding on the -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Functions
♦ Adapting the antenna parameter
Parking Aid Control Module - J446- ,
Checking
AG.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Parking aid control module is equipped with on board diagnostics
(OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.21
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Immobilizer IV with download
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Parking Aid
♦ Parking aid electrical components
♦ Parking aid control module
4. Diagnosis and Testing
129
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.22
Parking Aid Shut-Off Speed, Adapting
Parking Aid Control Module - J446- is equipped with On Board
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
Diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
es
wage
ks
Vol
by
To diagnose, use the guided fault findingedfunction
of the ris
VAS5051B- .
o
th
au
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Parking Aid
♦ Parking assistance functions
♦ Parking aid shut-off speed, adapting
Supression Range for Attachments,
Adapting
r
fo
ng
Parking Aid Control Module - J446- is equipped with on board
diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Parking Aid
♦ Parking assistance functions
♦ Supression range for attachments, adapting
4.24
Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer Vol‐
ume, Adapting
Parking Aid Control Module - J446- is equipped with On Board
Diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
– Connect the -VAS5051B⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
130
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4.23
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss to
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Parking Aid
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
volume,
adapting
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
♦ Parking assistance functions
♦ Rear parking aid speaker
Parking Aid Control Module - J446- is equipped with on board
diagnostics (OBD) which assists troubleshooting.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer Vol‐
ume, Adapting
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
To diagnose, use the guided fault finding function of the VAS5051B- .
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Parking assistance functions
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ Front parking aid speaker volume, adapting
Lane Change Assist, Side Assist
AG.
⇒ “4.26.1 Lane Change Assist, Calibrating”, page 131
agen
lksw
Vo
by
4.26
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Parking Aid
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
4.25
⇒ “4.26.2 Preparing for Calibration”, page 132
⇒ “4.26.3 Preliminary Work for Calibration”, page 133
⇒ “4.26.4 Lane Change Assistance Control Module J769 / Lane
Change Assistance Control Module 2 J770 , Calibrating”,
page 136
⇒ “4.26.5 Lane Change Assistance Control Module Output Di‐
agnostic Test Mode”, page 138
⇒ “4.26.6 Lane Change Assistance Control Module , Coding”,
page 138
4.26.1
Lane Change Assist, Calibrating
The left Lane Change Assistance Control Module - J769- (master)
or right Lane Change Assistance Control Module 2 - J770- (slave)
is combined into one unit with the radar sensor for the respective
side. They are located behind the rear bumper cover and must be
calibrated after:
♦ Removal and installation of the bumper cover
♦ Removal and installation of one or both lane change assis‐
tance control modules
♦ Each time the installation location of a lane change assistance
control module is changed
4. Diagnosis and Testing
131
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
There is much preparation work that must be performed before
calibrating using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “4.26.3 Preliminary Work for Calibration”, page 133 .
4.26.2
Preparing for Calibration
1 - Volkswagen Logo
❑ The laser pointer is
aligned on the center of
the Volkswagen logo
2 - Calibration Tool - Wheel
Center Mountings VAS6350/1❑ With 19 mm wheel bolt
adapter and measure
paddle
3 - Catch Bracket
❑ For mounting Calibra‐
tion Tool - Spacing La‐
ser - VAS6350/2- to per‐
form a distance meas‐
urement
❑ Distance to Calibration
Tool - Wheel Center
Mountings VAS6350/1- on rear
wheels: Dimension -a- =
1700 ± 2 mm.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
4 - Water Level
❑ On the Calibration Tool
- VAS6350❑ For checking the hori‐
zontal position of the VAS6350-
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
5 - Calibration Tool - VAS63506 - Plastic Foot
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Adjustable for aligning
horizontal position of VAS6350-
7 - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2❑ For distance measuring
❑ Usage ⇒ operating instructions
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
8 - Calibration Tool - Linear Laser - VAS6350/3❑ With laser eye protection
❑ On the -VAS6350❑ Switching on and off ⇒ operating instructions
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
9 - Measurement Scale
❑ For positioning Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4agen
lksw
Vo
by
10 - Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4❑ Is moved from the left to the right side of measuring field during calibration
❑ when installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line must be connected at bottom left of cali‐
bration device (as seen in direction of travel)
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
132
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.26.3
Preliminary Work for Calibration
There is much preparation work that must be performed before
calibrating using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
Determining which control module generation is installed:
Control modules from different generations are being installed for
the lane change assistance. It is necessary to first determine
which generation of the control module is installed in the vehicle
kswentered
agen AG when in‐
so that the correct adjustment values
can
. Volbe
AG
does
agen
stalling the -VAS6350ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
a
y
db
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
– Select the mode “On Board Diagnostic (OBD)” on the Vehicle
Diagnostic Tester .
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
The master control module generation is identified by a part num‐
ber with the index “A”, “B” or “C”. This will appear in the Vehicle
Diagnostic Tester display at the top on the right side. To deter‐
mine the control module generation, use the part numbers in the
following list:
Control module generation 1
Control module generation 1.5
- Part number, master control module
through 7L6.907.566, index A or B
- Part number, master control module
from 7L6.907.566, index C
Requirements for Calibrating
•
The vehicle is standing on a solid, level surface
•
Set the parking brake - vehicle must not move during meas‐
urement
•
Place front wheels in straight-ahead position - steering wheel
in 0 position
•
If the vehicle has air suspension, set the suspension height to
the middle setting (displayed in the instrument cluster).
•
Remove sticker with metal foil from bumper cover if necessary
•
No persons may be in the vehicle interior during the meas‐
urement
•
Do not open and close the vehicle doors during calibration
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
The lane change assistance control module generation must
be known
do
c
um
en
•
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
– Select “3C – lane change assistance”:
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ran
– Connect the Vehicle
ise Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
te
or
h
t
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle aDiagnosis,
Testing and Information Systems”, e or a
u
c
page 270 . ss
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Calibration Tool - VAS6350Procedure
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
Note
If a malfunction message appears in the display. Refer to the Ve‐
hicle Diagnostic Tester Operating Instructions.
– Turn on the ignition.
4. Diagnosis and Testing
133
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Attach three 19 mm wheel bolt adapters to each -VAS6350/1- .
– Insert the measuring paddle on both wheel center mountings
-VAS6350/1- and secure with lock nut.
– Place the -VAS6350/1- onto the wheel bolts on both rear
wheels.
•
The wheel center mounting rotation center must be in the ro‐
tation center of the wheel.
Note
Place the -VAS6350/1- on wheels so that “anti-theft wheel bolts”
are not connected with wheel center mounting.
– Adjust measuring paddle with aid of lock nuts so that they
move freely just above the floor.
•
The measuring paddles must move easily.
•
The measuring paddles must be vertical.
– Position -VAS6350- at distance -a- from rear wheels.
Dimension -a- = 1700 2 mm.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
– Switch -VAS6350/2- on with ON button.
•
“- - - m”
Note
r
fo
ng
Laser is switched on at same time.
– Hold the -VAS6350/2- -2- flush against the catch bracket, as
shown in the illustration, for the distance measurement.
Prote
cted
by
If this is not the case, measure paddle height must be corrected
using lock nuts on -VAS6350/1- .
134
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Make sure the laser beam for the distance measurement con‐
tacts the paddle on lower enlarged part -1-.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
The -VAS6350/2- lie firmly against catch bracket.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
•
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Display on -VAS6350/2- :
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
•
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Briefly press ON button for distance measurement.
Display on -VAS6350/2- :
•
“1,700 m” (specified value: 1,700 ± 2 mm).
– Repeat measurement procedure from left catch bracket to
measurement paddle on left rear wheel.
•
The distance value must be the same on both sides.
If both measured values are not the same, adjust -VAS6350- ac‐
cordingly.
– Secure -VAS6350/4- at left rear of -VAS6350- mount.
Note
When installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line
must be connected at bottom left of calibration device (as seen in
direction of travel).
Adjust the calibration device to the following dimensions accord‐
ing to the determined control module generation:
Control Modules - Gen‐ Height Dimension Left Adjustment
eration
-a- 1)
Dimension -1- 2)
1 (part number index A 650 mm
or B)
1.5 (part number index 650 mm
C)
674 mm
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
1) measured from the upper edge of the calibration device to athe
ut workshop floor.
ra
c
s
s
2) The adjustment dimension is set with the measuring point -arrow- on the base
of the calibration device on the scale of the steel ruler -1-.
850 mm
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Connect -VAS6350/4- to vehicle electrical system voltage.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Using the bubble level (level indicator) -arrow-, bring the VAS6350- into a horizontal position by turning the plastic
bases.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
4. Diagnosis and Testing
135
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Put on laser eye protection.
– Switch -VAS6350/3- on -VAS6350- on.
– Align the entire -VAS6350- so that the laser beam shines on
the center of the vehicle rear above the VW logo.
un
le
Specified value: 1700 ± 2 mm
4.26.4
Lane Change Assistance Control Mod‐
ule - J769- / Lane Change Assistance
Control Module 2 - J770- , Calibrating
Note
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Special tools and workshop equipment required
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
Before the actual calibration procedure for the lane change as‐
sistance control modules, the Calibration Tool - VAS6350- must
be set up as described in chapter
⇒ “4.26.3 Preliminary Work for Calibration”, page 133 .
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic, Testing and Information System VAS5051B- with Diagnostic Cable - VAS 5051/6 A♦ Calibration Tool - VAS6350The following should not occur during the calibration procedure:
•
Vehicle doors must not be opened or closed.
•
People should not sit in the vehicle.
•
People should not go between the vehicle and the Calibration
Tool For Lane Changing Assist - VAS6350/4- .
•
Do not switch off the ignition.
136
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
Lane change assistance control module, calibrating. Refer to
⇒ “4.26.4 Lane Change Assistance Control Module J769 / Lane
Change Assistance Control Module 2 J770 , Calibrating”,
page 136 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
•
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
–
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
Check right and aleft
u distance between catch bracket on ac
s
VAS6350- and smeasuring
paddle -1- on wheel sensors again.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Procedure
– Switch -VAS6350/4- on at power switch -3-.
•
The green LED -1- must light up.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Calibrate the lane change assistance control module -J769- /
-J770- using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
– Follow the instructions on the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.
During the course of the program, a request is made to switch the
calibration tool - lane change calibration tool -VAS6350/4- from
the left to the right side of the Calibration Tool - VAS6350- .
– Switch -VAS6350/4- off and move device.
Note
When installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line
must be connected at bottom left of calibration device (as seen in
direction of travel).
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Control Modules - Gen‐ Height Dimension Right Adjustment
eration
-a- 3)
Dimension -1- 4)
AG.
Prote
cted
by
674 mm
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Generation 1 (part num‐ 650 mm
ber index A or B)
Generation 1.5 (part
650 mm
number index C)
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Adjust the calibration tool to the following dimensions accord‐
ing to the determined control module generation:
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
Note
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
If the red LED -2- illuminates:utCheck
the calibration tool - lane
or
ac
a
change calibration tool -VAS6350/4.
ss
850 mm
3) measured from the upper edge of the calibration device to the workshop floor.
4) The adjustment dimension is set with the measuring point -arrow- on the base
of the calibration device on the scale of the steel ruler -1-.
– Switch -VAS6350/4- on at power switch -3-.
•
The green LED -1- must light up.
– Follow the instructions on the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.
– After successful lane change assistance calibration, switch the
ignition off and disconnect the diagnostic connector.
4. Diagnosis and Testing
137
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.26.5
Lane Change Assistance Control Mod‐
ule Output Diagnostic Test Mode
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Lane Change Assistance Control Module Output Diagnostic
Test Mode using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
4.26.6
Lane Change Assistance Control Mod‐
ule , Coding
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Code the Lane Change Assistance Control Module using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
4.27
Rearview Camera System, Rear Assist
⇒ “4.27.1 Rearview Camera System Control Module J772 , Cod‐
ing”, page 138
⇒ “4.27.2 Rearview Camera System, Calibrating”, page 138
4.27.1
Rearview Camera System Control Mod‐
ule - J772- , Coding
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding on the -VAS5051B- .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical Equipment
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic capable system
♦ Control module, coding
Rearview Camera System, Calibrating
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
4.27.2
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
♦ Functions rear view camera
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
♦ Rearview camera system
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
After performing service work on the vehicle, it may be necessary
to calibrate the rear view camera system anew. In detail, this is
the case after:
♦ Removing and installing rear view camera
♦ Removing and installing the rear bumper cover
♦ Repairing the rear bumper cover due to an accident
♦ Replacing the control module for rear view camera system
♦ Of a repair on the front or rear axle
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
138
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Special tools and workshop equipment required
do
c
um
en
There is some work, which must be performed, before performing
the actual calibration. Use the -VAS5051B- or the -VAS5052- .
This is described in the following.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Of an axle alignment
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
♦ Calibration Tool - VAS6350Preliminary Work for Calibration
Vehicle must stand on a firm and level surface to perform the cal‐
ibration. No persons may be in the vehicle interior during the
measurement. Vehicle must not be moved during the measure‐
ment, opening and closing of vehicle doors is to be avoided.
Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
ksw
not
l
o
gu
page 270 .
yV
b
a
d
ran
tee
or
ac
e
ris
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Bring the Steering Angle Sensor - G85- into
tho 0-position (wheels
au
straight ahead).
s
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
2 - Wheel Center Sensor VAS6350/1-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
1 - Wheel Center Sensor VAS6350/1-
pe
rm
itte
d
Overview of the Assembled Measuring Device
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
6 - Spacing laser - VAS6350/2❑ Notes on operation. Re‐
fer to operating instruc‐
tions.
do
c
um
en
5 - Line Laser - VAS6350/3❑ Switching on and off.
Refer to operating in‐
structions.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
4 - Plastic Foot
❑ Total of three on the un‐
der side of measuring
device
❑ Adjustable, for aligning
horizontal position of
measuring device
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
3 - Right-Side Angle Bracket
for Mounting Measuring Unit
for Distance Measurement
7 - Fluid Level on Measuring
Device
❑ For checking horizontal
position of measuring
device
8 - Left-Side Angle Bracket for
Mounting Measuring Unit for
Distance Measurement
9 - Calibration Tool for Lane
Changing Assist - VAS6350/4❑ Distance between the
angled brackets on the
calibration device
(-3 or 8- ) and the paddles on the rear wheel center wheel mounts: 1.50 m - 2.00 m -dimension A– Install the three 17 mm wheel bolt adapters into the holes for
the wheel center sensor.
– Mount the paddles on both wheel pick-ups and secure them
with the lock nuts.
4. Diagnosis and Testing
139
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Mount the wheel pick-ups on the wheel bolts on the rear
wheels. When doing this, the wheel pick-ups are positioned by
the O-rings in the adapters and held in place.
Note
Attach the wheel pick-ups onto wheels so that any installed antitheft wheel mounting bolts are not connected to the wheel bolt
adapters.
– Adjust paddle with aid of locking nuts so that they move freely
just above the floor.
Make sure the paddles move easily.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Position the -VAS6350/4- behind the vehicle with a distance olkswage
yV
of 1.50 m to 2.00 m between the angled brackets on the cali‐
db
se
bration device and the paddles at the rear wheel centeroriwheel
th
mounts as shown in the overview illustration -dimension
Aau
s
s
-9-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Bring -VAS6350/4- to a horizontal position. To do so, twist
plastic feet under calibration device so that air bubble in spirit
level is located exactly in the center of the indicator -arrow-.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
140
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Switch on the -VAS6350/2- for distance measurement with the
ON button. Adjust the distance laser to the distance measure‐
ment with the rear edge. The following display appears and
laser switches itself on:
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Switch on the laser on the calibration device -1- and align the
entire calibration device so that laser beam strikes on center
of vehicle rear end above the VW logo.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Hold distance laser for distance measurement -2- flush into
angle bracket on one side of calibration device as shown in
the illustration, distance laser must make contact firmly on an‐
gle bracket when doing this.
– Make sure that the laser beam from the distance laser for dis‐
tance measurement contacts the paddle -1- at the lower,
enlarged part.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
If this is not the case, paddles must be corrected accordingly via
clamping screws on the wheel pick-ups.
4. Diagnosis and Testing
141
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Hold the distance laser for distance measurement firmly by the
hand in the angle bracket on the measuring device while the
laser beam can be seen on the paddle. Now press the ON
button briefly for the distance measurement. When doing this,
the following display appears on screen:
The distance measurement is specified on the display in meters.
– Note the value read off.
– Repeat measuring procedure in the same manner for the other
rear wheel on the other side of the calibration device.
The distance value must be the same on both sides. If the value
is not identical, align the calibration device only as long until the
values on both sides are identical.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
rections accordingly.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
bla‐
ara
d
When aligning the calibration device, make sure the distance
nte
ise
r
o
ser beam still strikes the center above the VW logo and indicator
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
of fluid-level remains centered. If necessary, make further
cor‐
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
The dimension for distance that was measured must be entered
during calibration into the -VAS5051B- or -VAS5052- in millime‐
ters.
Rear view camera system, calibrating ⇒ page 142 .
Rearview Camera System, Calibrating
Note
Observe the points regarding the preparation for calibrating
⇒ page 139 .
– Connect the -VAS5051B- . Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding on the -VAS5051B- .
♦ Perform a rear view camber calibration
From here, you will be directed by the -VAS5051B- or the VAS5052- during the calibrating procedure.
142
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
Prote
cted
by
♦ Functions rear view camera
AG.
♦ Rearview camera system
agen
lksw
Vo
by
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic capable system
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ Electrical Equipment
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Body
do
c
um
en
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4.28
Driver Assistance Systems Front Cam‐
era - R242-
⇒ “4.28.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera, Calibrating”,
page 143
⇒ “4.28.2 Camera Control Module, Coding”, page 143
4.28.1
Driver Assistance Systems Front Cam‐
era, Calibrating
The lane assist system must be calibrated under the following
conditions:
♦ The fault Directional Stabilization Assistance Control Module
- J759- , no or incorrect basic setting/adaptation is present in
the DTC memory.
♦ The Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera - R242- was
replaced.
♦ The windshield was removed or replaced.
♦ The rear axle toe was adjusted.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
o
es n
w
♦ Modifications were performedVon
ot g
olks the suspension which affect
y
ua
b
d
vehicle height.
ran
e
s
ri
ho
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
un
le
4.28.2
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
Calibrating the driver assistance systems front camera. Refer to
⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; General Infor‐
mation
tee
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
t
♦ The vehicle level control
system sensors on vehicles with
au
damping regulationssor air suspension were adapted.
Camera Control Module, Coding
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnosis Tester .
– On the Vehicle Diagnosis Tester , select “Guided Fault Find‐
ing”.
– Using the “Go To” button, select “Functions/Component se‐
lection” and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Body repair procedures
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Camera control module functions
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Mod‐
ule - J502- , Coding
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
4.29
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Camera control module, coding
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Lane Assist
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnosis Tester
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270 .
– Select guided fault finding in Vehicle Diagnosis Tester .
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Chassis
♦ Tire pressure monitoring indicator
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
4. Diagnosis and Testing
143
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
Tire pressure monitoring system functionsris
nte
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
Coding the tire pressure monitoring ssystem
control module
c
s
♦ Parking Aid
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG.
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
144
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
♦
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
5. Removal and Installation
145
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5
Removal and Installation
⇒ “5.1 HID Headlamp”, page 147
⇒ “5.2 Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs”, page 157
⇒ “5.3 HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp (AFS), Vehicles
through 05/31/2010, through MY 2011”, page 167
⇒ “5.5 HID Headlamp, Vehicles from 05/31/2010, through MY
2011”, page 192
⇒ “5.4 HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control, Vehicles
through 05/31/2010, through MY 2011”, page 179
⇒ “5.6 Fog Lamps”, page 203
⇒ “5.7 Front Side Marker Lamp”, page 204
⇒ “5.8 Exterior Mirror Turn Signals”, page 205
⇒ “5.9 Exterior Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
205
⇒ “5.10 LED Tail Lamps”, page 206
⇒ “5.11 Self-Illuminating License Plate Lamp”, page 209
⇒ “5.12 License Plate Lamp X ”, page 210
⇒ “5.13 Illuminated License Plate”, page 211
⇒ “5.14 High Mounted Brake Light”, page 211
⇒ “5.15 Bulb Carrier”, page 211
⇒ “5.16
⇒ “5.17
⇒ “5.21 Front Passenger Access/Start Authorization Antenna”,
page 217
⇒ “5.22 Access/Start Authorization Antenna in Rear Bumper
R136 ”, page 217
⇒ “5.23 Luggage Compartment Access/Start Authorization An‐
tenna”, page 218
⇒ “5.24 Interior Access/Start Authorization Antenna 1”,
page 219
⇒ “5.25 Access/Start Authorization Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior”,
page 219
⇒ “5.26 Interior Access/Start Authorization Antenna 3”,
page 220
⇒ “5.27 Parking Aid”, page 221
⇒ “5.28 Lane Change Assistance Control Module with Radar
Sensor”, page 224
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “5.29 Lane Change Assistance Exterior Rearview Mirror Warn‐
ing Lamp”, page 226
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
⇒ “5.30 Rearview Camera System Control Module J772 ”,
page 226
⇒ “5.31 Rearview Camera”, page 227
146
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
⇒ “5.20 Driver Access/Start Authorization Antenna”, page 217
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
⇒ “5.19 Access/Start Authorization Control Module J518 ”, page
216
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
⇒ “5.18
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
Steering Columny VSwitch”,
page 212
ua
b
ra
ed
s
i
r Authorization Switch E415 ”, page 214 ntee
Access/Start
o
h
t
or
ac
au
ss
Access/Start
Authorization Button E408 ”, page 216
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
⇒ “5.32 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera R242 ”,
page 227
⇒ “5.33 Directional Stabilization Assistance Windshield Heater”,
AG. Volkswagen AG d
page 228
agen
o
es n
o
w
olks
V
gu
⇒ “5.34 Tire Pressure
Monitoring System”, paget 228
by
ara
ed
nte
eo
ra
c
ris
ho
ut
a
ss
HID Headlamp
pe
rm
itte
d
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147
⇒ “5.1.3 High Beam Light Bulb”, page 150
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
⇒ “5.1.4 Parking Lamp Bulb”, page 151
⇒ “5.1.5 Turn Signal Bulb”, page 152
⇒ “5.1.6 Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor”,
page 153
⇒ “5.1.7 Headlamp Range Control Module”, page 155
⇒ “5.1.8 Level Control System Sensor”, page 156
5.1.1
Headlamps
Special tools and workshop equipment required
Removing
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Note
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
⇒ “5.1.2 Low Beam Gas-Discharge Bulb”, page 149
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
5.1
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery ground (GND) cable.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
5. Removal and Installation
147
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the lower bolt -arrow- at the rear of the headlamp. en AG. Volkswagen AG
does
ag
ksw
not
gu
– Pull the headlamp housing out toward the front. by Vol
a
ed
ris
ho
t
au
ss
ran
tee
or
ac
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Disconnect the multi-pin connectors -1- and -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Prote
cted
by
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
148
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
If headlamp has an uneven gap dimension to the body, installa‐
tion position must be corrected. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Check installation position of headlamp for uniform gap di‐
mensions.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Tighten the lower bolt at the rear of the headlamp -arrow- to 6
Nm.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Tighten bolts -arrows- to 6 Nm.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.1.2
Low Beam Gas-Discharge Bulb
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas .discharge
headlamps.
AG Volkswagen AG d
Refer
to
agen
oes
w
s
k
not
Vol and Safety Precautions”, page
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage
g
y
ua
b
ran
ed
80 .
te
ris
tho
au
s
s
eo
ra
c
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
– Disconnect connector -1-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Press retaining clip -1- in direction of -arrow A- and retaining
clip -2- in direction of -arrow B- to the side and remove the
cover -3-.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Removing
5. Removal and Installation
149
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Squeeze the wire clip -arrow- and unlock it.
– Carefully pull the gas-discharge bulb out of the socket.
Safety glasses and gloves are necessary because the glass por‐
tion of gas-discharge bulbs are delicate, the interior pressure can
ranges from 7 bar (cold) to 100 bar (hot), and the bulbs can reach
700 °C (1292 °F).
Installing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
agen
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the
following:
lksw
WARNING
ss
o
yV
db
e
ris
tho
au
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
un
le
Note
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
♦ Do not touch the glass of the HID bulb when installing. Your
fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which will evap‐
orate and cloud the glass when the bulb is switched on.
♦ Do not subject the glass of the gas-discharge bulb to any me‐
chanical stress. The glass bulb is very fragile externally and is
under high pressure internally.
♦ Avoid looking directly into the light beam, since the UV-rays
♦ When installing cap, ensure proper seating. It is destroyed by
AG.
– Attach the wire clip again.
– Connect the metal connector again.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
5.1.3
High Beam Light Bulb
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
150
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Insert the new bulb, so that the retaining tabs fit into the
grooves of the reflector.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
ingress of water into headlamp.
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
given off by the gas-discharge lamp are approximately 2.5
times stronger than those of a halogen bulb.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove rubber cap -arrow- from headlamp housing.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
– Separate the connector -arrow-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Turn the bulb socket in direction of -arrow- and remove it from
the headlamp.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Note
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
The high beam headlamp bulb is permanently attached to the
bulb socket and cannot be replaced separately.
♦ When installing cap, ensure proper seating. It is destroyed by
ingress of water into headlamp.
♦ Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your
fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when
the light bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the
glass.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
5.1.4
Parking Lamp Bulb
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
5. Removal and Installation
151
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove rubber cap -arrow- from headlamp housing.
– Press the two retaining tabs inward -arrows- and remove the
socket with the bulb.
– Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
Note
♦ When installing cap, ensure proper seating. It is destroyed by
ingress of water into headlamp.
♦ Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your
fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when
swagcloud
en AG the
the light bulb is switched on, will evaporate
n AG. Volkand
does
wage
s
k
not
l
glass.
o
V
g
y
ua
ran
tee
.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
5.1.5
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Next, check function of headlamp.
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Turn Signal Bulb
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Disengage connector -2- and disconnect it.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
152
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
–
b
ed
ris
o
thRefer to
Install the headlamp.
au
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”,
page 147
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the turn signal lamp socket in direction of -arrow-.
– Remove turn signal socket with bulb from reflector.
– Press the turn signal bulb into the socket and turn it in direction
of -arrow-.
– Pull the turn signal bulb out of the socket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
Note
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
– Press the socket with bulb all the way into the reflector and
turn it to the right until it engages.
G. Volkswagen AG d
oes
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
A
agen
– Next, check function of headlamp.
lksw
o
yV
db
e
ris
tho
au
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Headlamp Range Control Positioning
ss
Motor
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
5.1.6
♦ The removal and installation of the headlamp beam adjusting
motor is described for the left headlamp. For removal and in‐
stallation of the right headlamp, the directions of rotation are
in the opposite direction.
♦ Always perform a basic setting on the headlamp whenever the
motor has been removed, installed or replaced. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Removing
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Note
5. Removal and Installation
153
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
–
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Disconnect the connector for the headlamp beam adjusting
motor -arrow-.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
– Pull the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- approximately 1
cm. out of the mounting -1-.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- in direction of
-arrow- until resistance is felt.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- approximately 2°
in opposite direction of arrow and pull the headlamp beam ad‐
justing motor -2- out of the mounting -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
154
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -1- in direction of
-arrow-.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
–
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
n
l
o
Press retaining clip -1- in direction
of -arrow A- and retainingot gua
yV
b
d
ran
e
clip -2- in direction of -arrow
B- to the side.
tee
ris
ho
t
or
u
ac
a
Remove cover -3-. ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Hold the gas-discharge bulb for low beam light and press the
adjusting shaft of the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- into
the adjusting shaft recess -1-.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -1- in direction of
-arrow- until resistance is felt.
Note
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
5.1.7
Headlamp Range Control Module
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
– Remove the headlamp adjustment mechanism.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
When installing cap, ensure proper seating. It is destroyed by in‐
gress of water into headlamp.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
–
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
Place the headlamp
beam
adjusting
motor
into
the
mounting
is
r
o
eo
h while turning it in direction of -arrow-.
and engageautit,
ra
c
s
s
5. Removal and Installation
155
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the headlamp range control module from the head‐
lamp housing.
– Unclip the retaining clip for the gas discharge lamp connector
-1- in direction of -arrow- and disconnect the connector.
– Press the retaining tab of the headlamp range control module
connector -2- in direction of -arrow- and disconnect the con‐
nector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
When installing the control module make sure the gasket is prop‐
erly seated. It is destroyed by ingress of water into headlamp.
– Check the coding of the headlamp with gas-discharge bulb,
and recode the system if necessary. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”,
page 123 .
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
G. Volkswagen
A
does
agen if necessary.AG
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment,
Refer
ksw
not
l
o
V .
gu
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1
y
b
a
d
ise
ran
tee
or
ac
a
ss
The level control system transmits the vehicle inclination in the
form of a signal to the automatic headlamp range control system.
The level control system determines this signal from all of the
signals transmitted by the level control system sensors.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
156
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
The vehicle level control system sensor is a component of the
level control system. Level control system sensor, removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.
43 ; Removal and Installation .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
Level Control System Sensor
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
5.1.8
un
le
r
– Next, check function of uheadlamp.
tho
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.2
Headlamps with Two HID Bulbs
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157
⇒ “5.2.2 Low Beam Gas-Discharge Bulb”, page 158
⇒ “5.2.3 High Beam Gas-Discharge Bulb”, page 161
⇒ “5.2.4 Parking Lamp Bulb”, page 162
⇒ “5.2.5 Turn Signal Bulb”, page 163
⇒ “5.2.6 Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor”,
page 164
⇒ “5.2.7 Headlamp Range Control Module”, page 164
⇒ “5.2.8 HID Lamp High Beam Control Module”, page 165
⇒ “5.2.9 Level Control System Sensor”, page 166
5.2.1
Headlamps
. Volkswagen AG
Special tools and workshop equipment required kswagen AG
Vol
by
d
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331ise
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery ground (GND) cable.
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Pull the headlamp housing out toward the front.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Remove the lower bolt -arrow - at the rear of the headlamp.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
Note
r
ho
ut
a
ss
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Removing
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
5. Removal and Installation
157
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disconnect the multi-pin connectors -arrows- at the headlamp.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
– Tighten the bolts -arrows- to 6 Nm.
– Tighten the lower bolt -arrow- at the rear of the headlamp to 6
Nm.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
– Check installation position of headlamp for uniform gap di‐ olkswage
yV
mensions.
db
e
ris
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
tho
If headlamp has an uneven gap dimension to the body,uinstalla‐
a
tion position must be corrected. Refer to
ss
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123 .
5.2.2
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
– Next, check function of headlamp.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Low Beam Gas-Discharge Bulb
Removing
WARNING
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
158
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove the headlamp range control module. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.7 Headlamp Range Control Module”, page 164 .
do
c
um
en
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the bolts -arrows- from the console for the low beam
headlamp control module.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Disconnect the metal harness connector -arrow-.
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
5. Removal and Installation
159
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Squeeze the wire clip -arrow- and unlock it.
Safety glasses and gloves are necessary because the glass por‐
tion of gas-discharge bulbs are delicate, the interior pressure can
ranges from 7 bar (cold) to 100 bar (hot), and the bulbs can reach
700 °C (1292 °F).
– Carefully remove the gas-discharge bulb.
Installing
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
WARNING
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
♦ Do not touch the glass of the HID bulb when installing. Your
fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which will evap‐
orate and cloud the glass when the bulb is switched on.
♦ Do not subject the glass of the gas-discharge bulb to any me‐
♦ Avoid looking directly into the light beam, since the UV-rays
– When installing the console, insert the guides -arrows- into the
recesses.
– Install headlamp range control module. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.7 Headlamp Range Control Module”, page 164 .
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
160
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
Prote
cted
by
– Connect the metal connector again.
AG.
– Attach the wire clip again.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Insert the new bulb, so that the retaining tabs fit into the
grooves of the reflector.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
given off by the gas-discharge lamp are approximately 2.5
times stronger than those of a halogen bulb.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
chanical stress. The glass bulb is very fragile externally and is
under high pressure internally.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.2.3
High Beam Gas-Discharge Bulb
Removing
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Remove rubber cap -arrow- from headlamp housing.
5. Removal and Installation
161
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Squeeze the wire clip -arrow- and unlock it.
Safety glasses and gloves are necessary because the glass por‐
tion of gas-discharge bulbs are delicate, the interior pressure can
ranges from 7 bar (cold) to 100 bar (hot), and the bulbs can reach
700 °C (1292 °F).
– Carefully remove the gas-discharge bulb.
– Disconnect the metal harness connector.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
reverse order
nte
ise of removal, note the following:
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Installing
Install in
♦ Do not touch the glass of the HID bulb when installing. Your
fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which will evap‐
orate and cloud the glass when the bulb is switched on.
♦ Do not subject the HID bulb glass to any mechanical stress.
The glass bulb is very fragile externally and is under high
pressure internally.
♦ Avoid looking directly into the light beam, since the UV-rays
given off by the gas-discharge lamp are approximately 2.5
times stronger than those of a halogen bulb.
♦ When installing cap, ensure proper seating. It is destroyed by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Connect the metal connector again.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
ingress of water into headlamp.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Note
The metal harness connector must be connected before installing
the gas-discharge bulb.
– Insert new lamp so that catches lie in cut-out on reflector.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
5.2.4
Parking Lamp Bulb
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
162
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
WARNING
Phaeton 2003 ➤
- Edition 03.2016
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Turn the parking lamp socket in direction of -arrow-.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Pull the bulb -2- in direction of -arrow- from socket -1-.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove the socket with parking lamp bulb from the headlamp
housing.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
– Disengage
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
Electrical
b
ara Equipment
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
th
ra
connector s-2au and disconnect it.
c
s
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
– Push the socket with parking lamp bulb all the way into the
reflector and engage it.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
5.2.5
Turn Signal Bulb
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
5. Removal and Installation
163
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage connector -3- and disconnect it.
– Turn the turn signal lamp socket in direction of -arrow-.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Press the turn signal bulb into the socket and turn it in direction
of -arrow-.
– Pull the turn signal bulb out of the socket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Prote
cted
by
Headlamp Range Control Positioning
Motor
The headlamp beam adjusting motor cannot be removed on
headlamps with two gas-discharge bulbs.
If the headlamp beam adjusting motor is faulty, the headlamp
must be replaced.
5.2.7
Headlamp Range Control Module
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
164
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
5.2.6
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Next, check function of headlamp.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Press the socket with bulb all the way into the reflector and
turn it to the right until it engages.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Remove turn signal socket with bulb from reflector.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the headlamp range control module from the head‐
lamp housing.
–
Installing
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
connector -2- in direction of -arrow- and disconnect the con‐
nector.
When installing the control module make sure the gasket is prop‐
erly seated. It is destroyed by ingress of water into headlamp.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
– Check the coding of the headlamp range control module and
recode, if necessary. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”,
page 123 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
HID Lamp High Beam Control Module
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
5.2.8
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Next, check function of headlamp.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
–
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
e
wage
s
k
l
Unclip the retaining clip for the gas
o discharge lamp connector s not g
yV
ua
b
d
ran
-1- in direction of -arrow- andisedisconnect
the connector.
tee
r
o
h
t
or
uthe headlamp range control module
Press the retaining tab of
ac
a
ss
Note
The HID lamp high beam control module is not capable to selfdiagnose.
Removing
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
5. Removal and Installation
165
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the headlamp adjustment mechanism.
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
pe
rm
itte
d
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
– Press the retaining tab of the connector -2- in direction of
-arrow- and disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
Note
When installing the control module make sure the gasket is prop‐
erly seated. It is destroyed by ingress of water into headlamp.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Level Control System Sensor
agen
lksw
Vo
by
5.2.9
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Next, check function of headlamp.
The level control system transmits the vehicle inclination in the
form of a signal to the automatic headlamp range control system.
The level control system determines this signal from all of the
signals transmitted by the level control system sensors.
AG.
The vehicle level control system sensor is a component of the
level control system. Level control system sensor, removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.
43 ; Removal and Installation .
166
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 Headlamps”, page 157 .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Unclip the retaining clip for the gas discharge lamp connector
-1- in direction of -arrow- and disconnect the connector.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Remove the HID lamp high beam control module from the
headlamp housing.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.3
HID Headlamp and Cornering Lamp
(AFS), Vehicles through 05/31/2010,
through MY 2011
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167
⇒ “5.3.2 Bulb”, page 169
lkswagen AG
n AG. Vo
⇒ “5.3.3 Cornering Lamp Bulb,
Cornering
Lamp”,
does
ageStatic
ksw
not
l
o
page 171
gu
yV
b
ed
ris Bulb, Replacing”, page 172
⇒ “5.3.4 Turn Signal
tho
au
ara
nte
e
or
a
⇒ “5.3.6 HID Headlamp Control Module”, page 174
⇒ “5.3.7 Headlamp Power Output Stages”, page 175
⇒ “5.3.8 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 ”, page 176
⇒ “5.3.9 Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor”,
page 177
⇒ “5.3.10 Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid”, page 179
⇒ “5.3.11 Level Control System Sensor”, page 179
5.3.1
Headlamps
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331Removing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
Note
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss Running Lamp and Parking Lamp Control Mod‐ c
⇒ “5.3.5 Daytime
ule”, page 173
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery ground (GND) cable.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
5. Removal and Installation
167
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the lower bolt -arrow- on the back of the headlamp.
– Remove the headlamp housing forward through the opening
in the body. Pay attention the wires still connected.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Tighten the lower bolt at the rear of the headlamp -arrow- to 6
Nm.
– Check installation position of headlamp for uniform gap di‐
mensions.
If headlamp has an uneven gap dimension to the body, installa‐
tion position must be corrected. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
168
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Tighten the bolts -arrows- to 6 Nm.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
– Disengage and disconnect the connector on the headlamp
-arrow-.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.3.2
Bulb
Note
♦ Function of Left HID Headlamp Bulb - L13- and Right HID
Headlamp Bulb - L14- can be checked using Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module - J519- output diagnostic test mode
(DTM).
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of gas-discharge headlamp at
left headlamp.
♦ The same procedure is used to remove and install the Left HID
headlamp bulb and right HID headlamp bulb.
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
d
ris
ho
ut
a
ss
tee
or
ac
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
a
oes
ksw
not
– Remove the bolts -arrowsVol on the low beam control module
gu
by
ara
bracket.
d
e
n
5. Removal and Installation
169
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the release -1- in direction of -arrow- and remove the HID
bulb.
– Disconnect the metal connector.
Safety glasses and gloves are necessary because the glass por‐
tion of gas-discharge bulbs are delicate, the interior pressure can
ranges from 7 bar (cold) to 100 bar (hot), and the bulbs can reach
700 °C (1292 °F).
– Carefully remove the gas-discharge bulb.
D1S, 12V 35W HID bulb
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Note
un
le
♦ Do not touch the glass of the HID bulb when installing. Your
♦ Do not subject the glass of the gas-discharge bulb to any me‐
chanical stress. The glass bulb is very fragile externally and is
under high pressure internally.
♦ Avoid looking directly into the light beam, since the UV-rays
given off by the gas-discharge lamp are approximately 2.5
times stronger than those of a halogen bulb.
– Connect the metal connector again.
– Install the new bulb so that retaining tabs lie in cut-outs in re‐
flector.
– Turn the release -1- opposite the direction of -arrow- to unlock
the HID bulb.
AG.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Make sure the seal fits correctly.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
– Check headlamp for function.
170
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Note
r
fo
ng
– Install the cover.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which will evap‐
orate and cloud the glass when the bulb is switched on.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
03.2016
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Cornering Lamp Bulb, Static Cornering
Lamp
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
5.3.3
olkswagen A
AG. V
Electrical
Equipment
- Edition
G do
agen
es n
ksw
l
ot g
o
V
y
ua
b
ran
ed
tee
ris
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Left Cornering Lamp Bulb - L148- and Right Cornering Lamp Bulb
- L149- can be checked via output Diagnostic Test Mode (DTM)
of Headlamp Range Control Module - J431- .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Note
♦ Replacing the cornering lamp bulb in a left headlamp is shown
in the following illustrations.
♦ The same procedure is used to remove and install the left cor‐
nering lamp bulb and right cornering lamp bulb.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
Only Vehicles with 6.0L Injection Engine, 331 KW (W12)
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Open the wire clips in direction of -arrow- and open the cover.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Continuation for All Vehicles
do
c
um
en
– Remove the air intake on each side. Refer to ⇒ Engine Me‐
chanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 24 ; Description
and Operation .
AG.
– Disconnect the cornering lamp bulb connector -1-.
5. Removal and Installation
171
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
olkswagen AG
en AG. V
g
doewith
s no a suit‐
– Release the tabs on both
-arrow- of the bulb
swa
ksides
t gu
Vol
y
able screwdriver. ed b
ara
ris
tho lamp bulb out of the socket.
– Pull the cornering
au
un
le
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
– Insert the socket and cornering lamp bulb all the way into the
reflector and turn to the right.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
r
fo
ng
Turn Signal Bulb, Replacing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Note
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.3.4
♦ Function of Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5- and Right Front
Turn Signal Bulb - M7- can be checked using Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module - J519- .
AG.
♦ Replacing the front turn signal in a left headlamp is shown in
the following illustrations.
♦ The same procedure is used to remove and install the left front
turn signal bulb and right front turn signal bulb.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
Only Vehicles with 6.0L Injection Engine, 331 KW (W12)
– Remove the air intake on each side. Refer to ⇒ Engine Me‐
chanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 24 ; Description
and Operation .
Continuation for All Vehicles
– Open the wire clips in direction of -arrow- and open the cover.
172
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
Cornering lamp bulb: H7 12V, 55W
nte
eo
ra
c
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the socket for the turn signal bulb -3- in direction of
-arrow-.
– Remove the socket and turn signal bulb from the reflector and
disconnect the connector -2-.
– Press the turn signal bulb into the socket and turn it -arrow-.
– Pull the turn signal bulb out of the socket.
Turn signal bulb: PY 12V, 21W
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
G. Volkswage
n AG
gen A
swathe way into the re‐ does no
– Insert the socket and turn signal bulb
olkall
t gu
V
by
ara
flector and turn to the right.
ed
is
or
Note
Daytime Running Lamp and Parking
Lamp Control Module
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
5.3.5
♦ The Left Daytime Running Lamp And Parking Lamp Control
Module - J860- and Right Daytime Running Lamp And Parking
Lamp Control Module - J861- are not capable of on board di‐
agnostic (OBD).
♦ Removing and installing the LED module on the left headlamp
is illustrated.
♦ Removing and installing the left daytime running lamp and
parking lamp control module and right daytime running lamp
and parking lamp control module is identical.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Removing
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
– Check headlamp for function.
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
th
– Check and correct headlamp
au adjustment, if necessary. Refer
ss
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet
16.1 .
5. Removal and Installation
173
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Open the wire clips in direction of -arrow- and open the cover.
– Disconnect the connectors and remove the control module
from the mount.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Check headlamp for function.
5.3.6
HID Headlamp Control Module
WARNING
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
gas discharge
headlamps.
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
to
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note usage and safety notes for
Refer
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
♦ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343- and Right HID
Headlamp Control Module - J344- is not capable of on board
diagnostic (OBD).
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of high-intensity gas dis‐
charge lamp control module at left headlamp.
♦ Replacement of left HID headlamp control module and right
HID headlamp control module is performed analogously.
Removing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
174
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the ballast from the mount.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Note
When installing the control module make sure the gasket is prop‐
erly seated. It is destroyed by ingress of water into headlamp.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
agen AG
. Volksw
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if anecessary.
Refer
gen AG
does
ksw
not
l
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
o
V
g
y
db
ise
r
tho
au
ua
ran
tee
– Check headlamp for function.
Headlamp Power Output Stages
or
ac
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
5.3.7
ss
WARNING
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Note
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of headlamp power output
stage at left headlamp.
♦ Replacement of Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Removing
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
and of Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668- is per‐
formed analogously.
5. Removal and Installation
175
AG.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the power output stage from the headlamp housing.
– Disconnect the connectors -arrows-.
Installing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
WARNING
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Install in reverse order of removal, note
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
the following:
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
When installing the power output stage, make sure the seal fits
correctly. It is destroyed by ingress of water into headlamp.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Headlamp Range Control Module J431-
– Remove the rear shelf lower section. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
176
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
Removing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
The headlamp range control module is located in the luggage
compartment under the rear shelf.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.3.8
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Check headlamp for function.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the control module from the mount -arrows-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
5.3.9
n AG d
AG
agen
oes
Headlamp Range
Control
Positioning
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
Motor
e
nt
ris
. Volkswage
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
♦ The removal and installation of the headlamp beam adjusting
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
motor is described for the left headlamp. For removal and in‐
stallation of the right headlamp, the directions of rotation are
in the opposite direction.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note
ee
or
ac
tho
au
s
s
♦ Always perform a basic setting on the headlamp whenever the
motor has been removed, installed or replaced. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Remove the bolts -arrows- and then remove the cover.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Disconnect the connector for the headlamp beam adjusting
motor -arrow-.
5. Removal and Installation
177
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -1- in direction of
-arrow-.
– Remove the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- approxi‐
mately 1 cm from the mount -1-.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- in direction of
-arrow- until resistance is felt.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- approximately 2°
opposite the direction of -arrow- and remove it from the mount
-1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
178
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -1- in direction of
-arrow- until resistance is felt.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Hold the gas-discharge bulb for low beam light and press the
adjusting shaft of the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- into
the adjusting shaft recess -1-.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Install the headlamp range control positioning motor in the
mount and turn it in direction of -arrow-.
Note
When installing cap, ensure proper seating. It is destroyed by in‐
gress of water into headlamp.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
5.3.10
HeadlampG. VReflector
Adjustment Sole‐
olkswagen AG
nA
e
g
d
a
oes
noid
ksw
not
Vol
g
y
db
ua
r
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
5.3.11
Level Control System Sensor
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
The level control system transmits the vehicle inclination in the
form of a signal to the automatic headlamp range control system.
The level control system determines this signal from all of the
signals transmitted by the level control system sensors.
The vehicle level control system sensor is a component of the
level control system. Level control system sensor, removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.
43 ; Removal and Installation .
HID Headlamp with Dynamic High
Beam Control, Vehicles through
05/31/2010, through MY 2011
⇒ “5.4.1 Headlamps”, page 179
⇒ “5.4.2 Bulb”, page 181
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
⇒ “5.4.3 Cornering Lamp Bulb”, page 183
agen
lksw
Vo
by
⇒ “5.4.4 Turn Signal Bulb”, page 184
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
5.4
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
an
e
Left Headlamp
Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N395tee and Right
ris
tho Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N396- are
olocated
u
Headlamp
in‐
ra
a
c
sidessthe headlamp and cannot be replaced or adjusted separate‐
ly.
⇒ “5.4.5 Daytime Running Lamp and Parking Lamp Control Mod‐
ule”, page 186
⇒ “5.4.6 Headlamp Control Module”, page 186
⇒ “5.4.7 Headlamp Power Output Stages”, page 187
⇒ “5.4.8 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 ”, page 188
⇒ “5.4.9 Headlamp Range Control Positioning Motor”,
page 189
⇒ “5.4.10 Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid”, page 191
⇒ “5.4.11 Level Control System Sensor”, page 191
5.4.1
Headlamps
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
5. Removal and Installation
179
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Removing
Note
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery ground (GND) cable.
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
lower bolt -arrownte
is on the back of the headlamp.
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
headlampss housing forward through the opening
c
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Disengage and disconnect the connector on the headlamp
-arrow-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
180
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Remove the
in the body. Pay attention the wires still connected.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Tighten the bolts -arrows- to 6 Nm.
– Tighten the lower bolt at the rear of the headlamp -arrow- to 6
Nm.
– Check installation position of headlamp for uniform gap di‐
mensions.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
s
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
w installa‐
If headlamp has an uneven gap dimension to theVbody,
olks
y
b
tion position must be corrected. Refer to
ed
ris
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp,
ho Correcting”,
t
u
page 123 .
sa
pe
rm
itte
d
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Bulb
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
5.4.2
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Check headlamp for function.
♦ Function of Left HID Headlamp Bulb - L13- and Right HID
Headlamp Bulb - L14- can be checked using Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module - J519- output diagnostic test mode
(DTM).
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of gas-discharge headlamp at
left headlamp.
headlamp bulb and right HID headlamp bulb.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
WARNING
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ The same procedure is used to remove and install the left HID
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
5. Removal and Installation
181
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the bolts -arrows- on the low beam control module
bracket.
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
a
ksw
– Turn the release -1- in direction of -arrow- and remove the HID
Vol
by
bulb.
d
e
– Disconnect the metal connector.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
Safety glasses and gloves are necessary because the glass por‐
tion of gas-discharge bulbs are delicate, the interior pressure can
ranges from 7 bar (cold) to 100 bar (hot), and the bulbs can reach
700 °C (1292 °F).
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ris
ho
ut
a
ss
– Carefully remove the gas-discharge bulb.
D1S, 12V 35W HID bulb
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
WARNING
chanical stress. The glass bulb is very fragile externally and is
under high pressure internally.
♦ Avoid looking directly into the light beam, since the UV-rays
given off by the gas-discharge lamp are approximately 2.5
times stronger than those of a halogen bulb.
– Connect the metal connector again.
– Install the new bulb so that retaining tabs lie in cut-outs in re‐
flector.
182
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
♦ Do not subject the glass of the gas-discharge bulb to any me‐
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which will evap‐
orate and cloud the glass when the bulb is switched on.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Do not touch the glass of the HID bulb when installing. Your
do
c
um
en
Note
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the release -1- opposite the direction of -arrow- to unlock
the HID bulb.
– Install the cover.
Note
Make sure the seal fits correctly.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work Descriptions .
– Check headlamp for function.
5.4.3
Cornering Lamp Bulb
Left Cornering Lamp Bulb - L148- and Right Cornering Lamp Bulb
- L149- can be checked via output diagnostic test mode (DTM) of
Headlamp Range Control Module - J431- .
Note
♦ The following illustrations depict replacement of left cornering
lamp.
♦ The same procedure is used to remove and install the left cor‐
nering lamp bulb andn Aright
lkswagen AGlamp bulb.
G. Vocornering
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
off all
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
r aand
electrical consumers
c
Only Vehicles with 6.0L Injection Engine, 331 KW (W12)
re‐
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
age
ksw
Vol
y
Removing ised b
r
ho
ut off ignition, switch
– Switch
a
ss
move
ignition key.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Remove the air intake on each side. Refer to ⇒ Engine Me‐
chanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 24 ; Description
and Operation .
Continuation for All Vehicles
– Open the wire clips in direction of -arrow- and open the cover.
do
c
um
en
5. Removal and Installation
183
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disconnect the cornering lamp bulb connector -1-.
– Release the tabs on both sides -arrow- of the bulbGwith
a suit‐
A . Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
able screwdriver.
n
lksw
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
o
yV
b
– Pull the cornering lamp bulb out ofristhe
ed socket.
tho
u
Cornering lamp bulb: H7 12V, 55W
sa
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
s
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
– Insert the socket and cornering lamp bulb all the way into the
reflector and turn to the right.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
Turn Signal Bulb
Turn Signal Bulb - M7- can be checked using Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module - J519- .
AG.
Prote
cted
by
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of front turn signal light at left
headlamp.
♦ The same procedure is used to remove and install the left front
turn signal bulb and right front turn signal bulb.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
Only Vehicles with 6.0L Injection Engine, 331 KW (W12)
– Remove the air intake on each side. Refer to ⇒ Engine Me‐
chanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 24 ; Description
and Operation .
184
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
♦ Function of Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5- and Right Front
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Note
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
5.4.4
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Continuation for All Vehicles
– Open the wire clips in direction of -arrow- and open the cover.
– Turn the socket for the turn signal bulb -3- in direction of arrow
-arrow-.
– Remove the socket and turn signal bulb from the reflector and
disconnect the connector -2-.
– Press the turn signal bulb into the socket and turn it -arrow-.
– Pull the turn signal bulb out of the socket.
Turn signal bulb: PY 12V, 21W
Installing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Install in reverse order of removal,
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
notess the
following:
c
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
– Insert the socket and turn signal bulb all the way into the re‐
flector and turn to the right.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
5. Removal and Installation
185
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.4.5
Daytime Running Lamp and Parking
Lamp Control Module
Note
♦ The Left Daytime Running Lamp And Parking Lamp Control
Module - J860- and Right Daytime Running Lamp And Parking
Lamp Control Module - J861- are not capable of on board di‐
agnostic (OBD).
♦ Removing and installing the LED module on the left headlamp
is illustrated.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Open the wire clips in direction of -arrow- and open the cover.
– Disconnect the connectors and remove the control module
from the mount.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Check headlamp for function.
Headlamp Control Module
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Note
♦ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343- and Right HID
Headlamp Control Module - J344- is not capable of On Board
Diagnostic (OBD).
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of high-intensity gas dis‐
charge lamp control module at left headlamp.
♦ Replacement of left HID headlamp control module and of right
HID headlamp control module is performed analogously.
Removing
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
186
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.4.6
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
♦
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
Removing and installing the left
y Vdaytime running lamp and
b
ara
d
e
nte
parking lamp control module
is and right daytime running lamp
r
o
eo
h
and parking lamp control
ut module is identical.
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the ballast from the mount.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Note
When installing the control module make sure the gasket is prop‐
lkswagen AG
G. Voheadlamp.
Ainto
erly seated. It is destroyed by ingress of water
do
agen
–
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
5.4.7
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Check headlamp for function.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
w
olks
yV
b
ed
Install the headlamp. Refer to
ris
ho167 .
t
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page
au
ss
Headlamp Power Output Stages
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of headlamp power output
stage at left headlamp.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
and of Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668- is per‐
formed analogously.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Removing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Replacement of Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667-
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Note
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
5. Removal and Installation
187
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the power output stage from the headlamp housing.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
removal,s anote
the following:
c
s
– Disconnect the connectors -arrows-.
Installing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Install in reverse order of
WARNING
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Note usage and safety notes for gas discharge headlamps.
Refer
to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
When installing the power output stage, make sure the seal fits
correctly. It is destroyed by ingress of water into headlamp.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
The headlamp range control module is located in the luggage
compartment under the rear shelf.
Removing
– Remove the rear shelf lower section. Refer to ⇒ Body; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
188
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
Headlamp Range Control Module J431-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
5.4.8
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Check headlamp for function.
do
c
um
en
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the control module from the mount -arrows-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary.nRefer
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
wage
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
s
k
no
l
o
Headlamp Range Control Positioning
Motor
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
5.4.9
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
yV
db
ir se
ho
ut
a
ss
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
– Check headlamp for function.
♦ The removal and installation of the headlamp beam adjusting
motor is described for the left headlamp. For removal and in‐
stallation of the right headlamp, the directions of rotation are
in the opposite direction.
♦ Always perform a basic setting on the headlamp whenever the
motor has been removed, installed or replaced. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Remove the bolts -arrows- and then remove the cover.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.1.1 Headlamps”, page 147 .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
Removing
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Disconnect the connector for the headlamp beam adjusting
motor -arrow-.
5. Removal and Installation
189
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -1- in direction of
-arrow-.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- in direction of
-arrow- until resistance is felt.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- approximately 2°
opposite the direction of -arrow- and remove it from the mount
-1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Turn the headlamp beam adjusting motor -1- in direction of
-arrow- until resistance is felt.
190
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Hold the gas-discharge bulb for low beam light and press the
adjusting shaft of the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- into
the adjusting shaft recess -1-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Remove the headlamp beam adjusting motor -2- approxi‐
mately 1 cm from the mount -1-.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
olkswagen AG
en AG. V
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ag
– Install the headlamp range control positioning motorolkin
swthe
V
y
mount and turn it in direction of -arrow-.
b
ed
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note
ris
ho
ut
a
ss
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
When installing cap, ensure proper seating. It is destroyed by in‐
gress of water into headlamp.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
5.4.10
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Sole‐
noid
Left Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N395- and Right
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N396- are located in‐
side the headlamp and cannot be replaced or adjusted separate‐
ly.
Level Control System Sensor
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
The vehicle level control system sensor is a component of the
level control system. Level control system sensor, removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.
43 ; Removal and Installation .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
The level control system transmits the vehicle inclination in the
form of a signal to the automatic headlamp range control system.
The level control system determines this signal from all of the
signals transmitted by the level control system sensors.
do
c
um
en
5.4.11
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.3.1 Headlamps”, page 167 .
5. Removal and Installation
191
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.5
HID Headlamp, Vehicles from
agen AG
n AG. VolkswMY
does
05/31/2010,
through
2011
age
n
lksw
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
o
yV
b
ed page 192
⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”,
ris
tho
s
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
⇒ “5.5.3 Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting”, page 193
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
u
⇒ “5.5.2 Headlamp,
Adjusting”, page 193
sa
⇒ “5.5.4 Left and Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing
and Installing”, page 193
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
⇒ “5.5.5 Left and Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 /
V49 , Removing and Installing”, page 194
⇒ “5.5.6 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and
Installing”, page 196
⇒ “5.5.7 Left and Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
LED Module L176 / L177 , Removing and Installing”, page 197
⇒ “5.5.8 Left and Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L148 / L149 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 198
⇒ “5.5.9 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing and Installing”,
page 198
⇒ “5.5.10 Left and Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 /
J344 , Removing and Installing”, page 199
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
⇒ “5.5.11 Left and Right Headlamp Power Output Module J667 /
J668 , Removing and Installing”, page 200
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “5.5.12 Turn Signal Control Module, Removing and Installing”,
page 201
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
⇒ “5.5.13 Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module
J745 , Removing and Installing”, page 201
AG.
⇒ “5.5.14 Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid, Removing
and Installing”, page 202
⇒ “5.5.15 Left and Right Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor V318 /
V319 , Removing and Installing”, page 202
⇒ “5.5.16 Left and Right Swivel Module Position Sensor G474 /
G475 , Removing and Installing”, page 202
⇒ “5.5.17 Left and Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor
V446 / V447 , Removing and Installing”, page 202
⇒ “5.5.18 Sensor for Left and Right Variable Headlamp Position‐
ing Motor G695 / G696 , Removing and Installing”, page 203
5.5.1
Headlamp
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electric consumers and remove the
key.
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing .
192
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the screws -arrows-.
– Remove the lower screw -arrow- on the back of the headlamp.
– Remove the headlamp housing forward through the opening
in the body. Pay attention the wires still connected.
– Disengage and disconnect the connector on the headlamp
-arrow-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Check the headlamp gap dimensions to the body, and correct
the headlamp installation position if necessary.
gen AG to
AG. VolkswaRefer
does
agen
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of oHID
ksw Headlamp, Correcting”,
not
l
V
gu
y
page 123
ara
db
e
ris
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
– Check headlamp for function.
Tightening Specifications
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
5.5.2
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Headlamps”, page 97
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ho
– Check and correct headlamp
adjustment, if necessary. Refer
ut
to ⇒ Maintenance s;s aBooklet 16.1 .
Headlamp, Adjusting
Adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
5.5.3
Headlamp Installation Position, Correct‐
ing
– Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting. Refer to
⇒ “4.4 Installation Position of HID Headlamp, Correcting”,
page 123 .
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
The front turn signal bulb are LED lamps and are integrated in the
headlamp. Changing the LEDs is not possible.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
do
c
um
en
Left and Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5- / -M7- , Removing and Installing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.5.4
5. Removal and Installation
193
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
un
le
Note
♦ The removal and installation of the headlamp beam adjust‐
ment motor is described for the left headlamp. For removal and
installation of the right headlamp, the directions of rotation are
in the opposite direction.
♦ Always perform a basic setting on the headlamp whenever the
motor has been removed, installed or replaced. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
Removing
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove the housing cover with the control modules while
paying attention to the connected wires.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Release and disconnect the connectors from the control mod‐
ules.
AG.
– Remove the housing cover with the control modules.
– Disconnect the connector from the headlamp beam adjust‐
ment motor -arrow-.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjustment motor -1- in the direction
of the -arrow-.
194
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
Left and Right Headlamp Beam Adjust‐
ment Motor -V48- / -V49- , Removing
and Installing
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
5.5.5
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
Phaeton 2003 ➤
is
r
o
eo
h
ut - Edition 03.2016
ra
Electrical Equipment
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the headlamp beam adjustment motor -2- approxi‐
mately 1 cm from the mount -1-.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjustment motor -2- in the direction
of the -arrow- until there is resistance.
– Turn the headlamp beam adjustment motor -2- approximately
2° opposite the direction of the -arrow- and remove it from the
mount -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal while noting the following:
– Hold the HID headlamp bulb for low beam light and press the
AG. Volkswagen AG d
adjusting shaft of the headlamp range control positioning mo‐
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
tor -2- into the adjusting shaft mount -1-.
gu
yV
b
ed
ris
o
h
t
au
ss
ara
nte
e
or
ac
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Turn the headlamp beam adjustment motor -1- in the direction
of the -arrow- until there is resistance.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Caution
do
c
um
en
– Place the headlamp beam adjustment motor in the mount and
secure it by turning it in the direction of the -arrow-.
There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Headlamps”, page 97
5. Removal and Installation
195
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.5.6
Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb -L13- / L14- , Removing and Installing
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
ran
ed
s
i
tee
r Headlamp Bulb - L13- and the
The function of the Left HID
o
h
t
or
u - L14- can be checked using the
Right HID Headlamp Bulb
ac
a
ss
Note
♦
un
le
headlamp.
♦ The same procedure is used to replace the Left HID Headlamp
Bulb - L13- and the Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14- .
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for HID headlamp bulbs. Refer to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
– Remove the housing cover with the control modules while
paying attention to the connected wires.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Release and disconnect the connectors from the control mod‐
ules.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
196
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Remove the housing cover with the control modules.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
♦ Illustrations show replacing a hid headlamp bulb on the left
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519- output diag‐
nostic test mode.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the release -1- in direction of -arrow- and remove the HID
bulb.
– Disconnect the metal connector.
n AG. Volkswagen A
G do
es n
wage
Safety glasses and gloves are necessary
because
the bulb glass
ot g
olks
V
y
ua
of HID headlamp bulbs are delicate,
the
interior
pressure
can
b
d
ran
e
ranges from 7 bar (cold) to 100 bar
tee
ris (hot), and the bulbs can reach
o
h
t
or
700 C.
a
au
c
ss
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Carefully remove the gas-discharge bulb.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
Installing
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
D1S, 12V 35W HID bulb
Install in reverse order of removal while noting the following:
WARNING
Note usage and safety notes for HID headlamp bulbs. Refer to
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”, page
80 .
Caution
♦ Do not put the HID headlamp bulb glass under any me‐
chanical stress. The bulb glass is very fragile externally
and is under high pressure internally.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
♦ Use clean gloves to insert the HID headlamp bulb.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Do not touch the HID headlamp bulb glass with bare
hands. Fingers leave traces of grease on the bulb glass
which can evaporate when the HID headlamp bulb is
switched on causing the bulb glass to cloud.
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.
AG.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.
– Install the new bulb so that retaining tabs lie in cut-outs in re‐
flector.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Headlamps”, page 97
5.5.7
Left and Right Daytime Running Lamp
and Position Lamp LED Module -L176- /
-L177- , Removing and Installing
The Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module
- L176- and the Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
LED Module - L177- are located inside the headlamp and cannot
be replaced individually.
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
5. Removal and Installation
197
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.5.8
Left and Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L148- / -L149- , Removing and Installing
The Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb -L148- / -L149- sits in the
headlamp housing and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
5.5.9
Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and
Position Lamp Control Module -J860- / J861- , Removing and Installing
Note
♦ The illustrations show the replacement of the left daytime run‐
ning lamp and position lamp control module.
♦ Replacing the Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
Control Module - J860- and Right Daytime Running Lamp and
Position Lamp Control Module - J861- is done the same way.
Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
– Remove the bolts -A arrows-.
– Remove the cap -1- from the headlamp while paying attention
to the connected wires.
– Release and disconnect the connectors from the Left Daytime
Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J860-2-.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
ran
ed
s
i
and Position
Lamp
tee
r
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Release the retainers -B arrows- on the cap -1-.
– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp
Control Module - J860- -2-.
Install in reverse order of removal.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.
– Check headlamp for function.
Tightening Specifications
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
198
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Headlamps”, page 97
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Installing
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.5.10
Left and Right HID Headlamp Control
Module -J343- / -J344- , Removing and
Installing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise HID headlamp bulbs. Refer to
r
Note usage and safety notes
for
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage
and Safety Precautions”, page
a
c
s
s
80 .
WARNING
♦ The illustrations show the replacement of the left HID head‐
lamp control module.
♦ Replacing the Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343- and
the Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344- is done the
same way.
Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -2- from the Left HID
Headlamp Control Module - J343- -1-.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove the Left Hid Headlamp Control Module - J343- -1-.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Installing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove the Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343- -1from the housing cover while paying attention to the connected
wires.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following.
– Check the seal between the Left HID Headlamp Control Mod‐
ule - J343- and the headlamp housing for damage.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.
♦ Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the HID
headlamp control module. Water getting in the headlamp
will cause damage.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Headlamps”, page 97
5. Removal and Installation
199
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.5.11
Left and Right Headlamp Power Output
Module -J667- / -J668- , Removing and
Installing
WARNING
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
w
Note usage and safety notes for HID headlamp bulbs.y VRefer
olks to
b
⇒ “1.1 HID Headlamps, Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page
ed
ris
80 .
tho
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Note
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
au
ss
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
♦ Illustrations depict replacement of headlamp power output
module at left headlamp.
♦ Replacing the Left Headlamp Power Output Module - J667-
and the Right Headlamp Power Output Module - J668- is done
the same way.
Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
Install in reverse order of removal while noting the following:
– Check the seal between the Left Headlamp Power Output
Module - J667- and the headlamp housing for damage.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.
♦ Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the Left
Headlamp Power Output Module - J667- . Water getting
in the headlamp will cause damage.
– Check and correct headlamp adjustment, if necessary. Refer
to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Check headlamp for function.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Headlamps”, page 97
200
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
Installing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Remove the Left Headlamp Power Output Module - J667-1-.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2- from the Left Head‐
lamp Power Output Module - J667- -1-.
do
c
um
en
– Remove the Left Headlamp Power Output Module - J667-1- from the housing cover while paying attention to the con‐
nected wires.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.5.12
Turn Signal Control Module, Removing
and Installing
Note
♦ The following illustrations show the replacement of the turn
signal control module on the left headlamp.
♦ Replacing the left turn signal control module and the right turn
signal control module is done the same way.
Removing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
o
– Remove the left turn signal control module -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
5.5.13
Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range
Control Module - J745- , Removing and
Installing
The Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module J745- is located in the luggage compartment under the rear shelf.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Removing
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Release and disconnect the connectors from the left turn sig‐
nal control module -2-.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
– Release the retainers -arrows- on the cap -1-.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
es n
w
– Remove the Left Daytime
Running Lamp and Position
Lamp
ot g
olks
yV
ua
b
d- J860- . Refer to
Control Module
r
a
e
nte
ris
⇒ “5.5.9 Left/Right
Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
eo
ho
ut
ra
a
Control Module
J860
/
J861
,
Removing
and
Installing”,
c
s
s
page 198
– Remove the lower section of the rear shelf. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
5. Removal and Installation
201
AG.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the control module from the holder -arrows-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Code the Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Mod‐
ule - J745- . Refer to
⇒ “4.3 HID Headlamp Range Control Module, Coding”,
page 123 .
5.5.14
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Sole‐
noid, Removing and Installing
The HID headlamp bulbs generate only the low beam headlamp
in standard “Xenon” headlamps. “Bi-Xenon” allows “one” HID
headlamp to generate the low beam and high beam headlamp.
For this purpose, an electro-mechanical adjuster, the Left Head‐
lamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N395- or the Right Head‐
lamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N396- , opens the dimmed
region of low beam headlamp when high beam function is oper‐
ated and a high beam light emission results.
The Left Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N395- / Right
Headlamp Reflector Adjustment Solenoid - N396- is located in‐
side the headlamp and cannot be replaced or adjusted separate‐
ly.
olkswagen AG
en AG. V
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
g
swa
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced.
kRefer
Vol
y
b
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
ed
ris
ho
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
t
Left and Right Adaptive Cornering
Lamp
au
ss
Motor -V318- / -V319- , Removing and
Installing
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
5.5.15
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
The Left Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V318- or Right Adap‐
tive Cornering Lamp Motor - V319- is located inside the headlamp
and cannot be replaced separately.
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
5.5.16
Left and Right Swivel Module Position
Sensor -G474- / -G475- , Removing and
Installing
The Left Swivel Module Position Sensor - G474- and Right Swivel
Module Position Sensor - G475- are located inside the headlamp
and cannot be replaced or adjusted separately.
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
202
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
The Left Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor - V446- or Right
Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor - V447- is located inside the
headlamp and cannot be replaced separately.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Left and Right Variable Headlamp Posi‐
tioning Motor -V446- / -V447- , Remov‐
ing and Installing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.5.17
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.5.18
Sensor for Left and Right Variable
Headlamp Positioning Motor -G695- / G696- , Removing and Installing
The Sensor for Left Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor - G695and the Sensor for Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor G696- are located inside the headlamp and cannot be replaced
or adjusted separately.
If a failure occurs, the entire headlamp must be replaced. Refer
to ⇒ “5.5.1 Headlamp”, page 192 .
5.6
Fog Lamps
⇒ “5.6.1 Fog Lamp”, page 203
⇒ “5.6.2 Fog Lamp Bulb”, page 204
5.6.1
Fog Lamp
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte re‐
s
i
r
Switch off hignition,
switch off all electrical consumers and
o
eo
ut
ra
move ignition
key.
a
c
s
s
Removing
–
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Remove the bolt -arrow- on the cover.
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Release both straps -arrows- on the cover.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Release the retaining tab -arrow- at the cover and remove the
cover.
5. Removal and Installation
203
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove screws -arrows-.
– Remove the fog lamp housing from the bumper and discon‐
nect the connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
– Check fog light adjustment and adjust if necessary. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
5.6.2
Fog Lamp Bulb
Removing
– Remove fog lamp. Refer to ⇒ “5.6.1 Fog Lamp”, page 203 .
– Turn lamp socket in direction of -arrow- and remove it from fog
lamp.
The lamp for fog light is joined firmly to lamp socket and cannot
be replaced separately.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Check fog light adjustment and adjust if necessary. Refer to
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 16.1 .
– Next, check function of headlamp.
5.7
Front Side Marker Lamp
Removing
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
– Switch off ignition and remove ignition key.
– Remove the front bumper cover ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
63 ; Removal and Installation .
r
fo
ng
AG.
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
204
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Release and disconnect connector.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
The following illustrations show removal of Left Front Side Marker
Lamp Bulb - M33- . Removal of Right Front Side Marker Lamp
Bulb - M34- is derived from this.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Release the retaining tab -1- and remove the connector from
the holder in the bumper cover -arrow-.
– Press the retaining tabs -2- downward to release -arrows-. By
simultaneously pressing the tabs -2- outward, unclip the posi‐
tion light out of the lower mounting.
– Keep the lower retaining tabs -2- compressed and, using a
screwdriver, carefully pry the position light from the upper re‐
tainers -1-.
– Remove the position light outward from the bumper cover.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Exterior Mirror Turn Signals
♦ The turn signals in the exterior mirrors have long-life LEDs
rather than standard bulbs.
♦ The LEDs cannot be replaced individually.
♦ If the turn signal in an exterior mirror must be replaced, then it
must replaced as a complete unit.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the turn signal in the exterior mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Removal and Installation .
Installing
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Removing
Exterior Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing
and Installing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.9
r
fo
ng
– Install the turn signal in the exterior mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Removal and Installation .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
Note
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
5.8
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the entry lamp. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Removal and Installation .
5. Removal and Installation
205
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Pull the socket with bulb -1- from the housing -2-.
– Pull the bulb -1- out of the socket -2-.
Exterior mirror entry lamp: 12V, 5W glass socket bulb
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
LED Tail Lamps
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
5.10
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
⇒ “5.10.1 Side Panel LED Tail Lamps”, page 206
⇒ “5.10.2 Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 207
5.10.1
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
⇒ “5.10.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 208
Side Panel LED Tail Lamps
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1410Removing
Note
The self-adhesive seal is to be replaced when removing and in‐
stalling. The seal can be from the Parts Catalog.
206
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Remove E-box in luggage compartment at left. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 E-Box, in Luggage Compartment on Left Side”,
page 270 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Only When Removing the Left Tail Lamp
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Open the side storage compartment on the side where the
taillight is to be removed.
do
c
um
en
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Continuation for Both Sides
– Remove the bolts -arrows- and remove the tail lamp housing.
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
– If a new taillight is being installed, remove the protective foil
. Volkswagen AG
from the gasket.
gen AG
d
– Connect harness connector.
oes
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Insert the tail lamp into the opening in
a
ksw
Vol
by
d
ise
or
theuthbody.
a
ss
pe
rm
itte
d
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
When installing the taillight housing, pay attention to the gap di‐
mensions. Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Tail Lamp Gap Dimensions”, page 120 .
– Hold the tail lamp on the body in the correction position and
tighten the bolts to 4 Nm.
It is not necessary to code or adapt the tail lamp after installing it.
– Check the tail lamp function. Refer to
⇒ “4.14 Tail Lamps, Checking Function”, page 126 .
5.10.2
Rear Lid Tail Lamps
AG.
The self-adhesive seal is to be replaced when removing and in‐
stalling. The seal can be ordered from the Parts Catalog.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Note
do
c
um
en
Removing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1410-
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Special tools and workshop equipment required
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the rear lid trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
5. Removal and Installation
207
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disconnect the connector -arrow-.
– Remove nuts -arrows-.
– Remove the lock washers and the tail light housing.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– If a new taillight is being installed, remove the protective foil
from the gasket.
– Connect harness connector.
– Insert the tail lamp into the opening in the body.
Note
When installing the taillight housing, pay attention to the gap di‐
mensions. Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Tail Lamp Gap Dimensions”, page 120 .
– Hold the tail lamp on the body in the correction position and
tighten the bolts to 4 Nm.
It is not necessary to code or adapt
the tail lamp after installing it.
. Volkswag
AG
agen
en AG
do
es n
ksw
ot g
– Check the tail lamp
Refer to
olfunction.
yV
ua
b
d
⇒ “4.14 Tail Lamps,
Checking
Function”,
page
126
. ran
e
is
tee
or
ac
r
ho
ut
a
ss
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the tail lamp in the rear lid. Refer to
⇒ “5.10.2 Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 207 .
– Remove the screws -arrows- on the back-up lamp bulb holder.
– Unclip the connections -1-.
– Remove the back-up light bulb holder from the light housing.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
208
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Rear Lid Tail Lamps
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
5.10.3
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the bulb socket with bulb for back-up light -1- from
the light housing.
The back-up light bulb is permanently attached to the bulb socket
and cannot be replaced separately.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
Do not touch the glass of the light bulb, when installing. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
– Place the bulb socket with the back-up light bulb -1- into the
guides -arrows- of the light housing.
– Install the tail lamp into the rear lid. Refer to
⇒ “5.10.2 Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 207 .
– Check the tail lamp function. Refer to
⇒ “4.14 Tail Lamps, Checking Function”, page 126 .
5.11
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
d
oes
wa
not Plate Lamp
Self-Illuminating
License
olks
gu
yV
b
a
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ra
ed
ris
Specialthotools
and workshop equipment required ntee o
ra
au
c
ss
♦ Heat
Gun - VAG1416-
♦ Plastic wedge
Removing
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Warm the area between the bumper and illuminated license
plate -arrows- using the -VAG1416- .
– Loosen the self-illuminating license plate lamp with a plastic
wedge.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
5. Removal and Installation
209
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disconnect the 4-pin connector from the self-illuminating li‐
cense plate lamp -arrow-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
un
le
5.12
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Clean the bumper and license plate surfaces before affixing the
license plate.
License Plate Lamp - X-
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the bolts -1- from the license plate lamp.
– Remove the diffusion lens -2- and bulb.
Note
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Prote
cted
by
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Note
♦ There is a small silver protective strip -arrow- applied to the
license plate lamp lens. When installing the lens, this strip
must always face the bumper.
♦ When assembling license plate light, make sure that diffusion
lens gasket has proper fit.
210
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
License plate bulb: tubular bulb 12V, 5W
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Disconnect the connector and remove the license plate lamp.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Using a suitable screwdriver, carefully pry license plate lamp
out of bumper cover at recess -arrow-.
do
c
um
en
When removing and installing visible components (switches, cov‐
ers, trim, etc.), cover area where prying tool (trim removal wedge,
screwdriver) will be used with adhesive tape.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.13
Illuminated License Plate
High Mounted Brake Light
The high-mounted brake lamp is installed in the lower section of
the rear lid.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the rear shelf. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ;
Removal and Installation
Installing
Light emitting diodes are soldered to a circuit board on the bulb
carrier. Light emitting diodes cannot be replaced separately, but
bulb carrier must be replaced completely in case of repair.
AG.
Removing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Note
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Bulb Carrier
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.15
r
fo
ng
Install in reverse order of removal.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
5.14
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
If the vehicle has a self-illuminating license plate lamp, there are
no license plate lamps installed.
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the rear shelf. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ;
Removal and Installation .
– After removing the rear shelf, place it on a clean surface with
the bottom side facing up.
– Separate the connector from the bulb holder.
5. Removal and Installation
211
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
Phaeton 2003
➤
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Electrical
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Remove the bulb holder in direction of -arrow-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
5.16
Steering Column Switch
Note
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Release Lever - T10039Removing
– Using the electrical or mechanical adjustment mechanism,
fully extend and lower the steering wheel.
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Remove the driver airbag unit. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 69 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 69 ; Removal and Installation .
212
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Pry the bulb holder out of the light -arrow-.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Pry the right cover -arrow- out of the retaining tabs on the
steering column switch using the release lever - T10039/1and push it outward.
– The left cover is a mirror image of the right and is released by
prying it out of the retaining
tabs on the steering column switch
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
ageand
using the -T10039/1pushing
it outward.
es n
w
s
lk
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
Do not remove the trim panel parts.
– Move the upper cover -top arrow- upward from the steering
column switch and remove it.
– Move the lower cover -bottom arrow- downward from the
steering column switch and remove it.
– Remove the steering column switch.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Remove socket head bolt -arrow-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
o
yV
db
e
ris
ho
ut
Note
a
ss
5. Removal and Installation
213
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Press the retaining clip off from the wiring harness -arrow-.
– Separate the connectors -arrows- from the steering column
switch.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Tighten the socket head bolt -arrow- to 1.5 Nm.
Prote
cted
by
Access/Start Authorization Switch E415Note
The access/start authorization switch with integrated lock cylinder
is an assembly and must be replaced as a complete unit.
214
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
5.17
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Install the driver airbag unit. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 69 ; Removal and Installation .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Install the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
69 ; Removal and Installation .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Guide in the lower steering column switch cover as shown
-arrows-.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Socket Tool - T10152Removing
Caution
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always per‐
form the work procedure as described in the repair manual.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Disconnect battery.
– Remove steering column tube with steering column. Refer to
⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Removal and
Installation .
Note
Remove or lower the steering column only so far as to allow the
access/start authorization switch to be removed and replaced
through the opening in the instrument panel.
– Use a small screwdriver to pry off the ring around the access/
start authorization switch.
– Place the -T10152- into the slots of the nut on the access/start
authorization switch.
– Remove the nut for the access/start authorization switch and
reach into the instrument panel opening and guide out the ac‐
cess/start authorization switch.
– Separate the multi-pin connector from the access/start au‐
thorization switch.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Tighten the nut of the access/start authorization switch by
hand using the -T10152- .
Adapting or coding the access/start authorization switch after re‐
moval and installation is not required.
5. Removal and Installation
215
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.18
Access/Start Authorization Button E408-
Removing
Caution
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always per‐
form the work procedure as described in the repair manual.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Disconnect battery.
– Remove gear selector cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
– Disconnect electrical connector.
– Remove the access/start authorization button.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
o
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
w
olks
V
Adaptation or coding of the access/start authorization
button is
by
ed
s
i
r
not necessary after removal and installation.
o
h
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
5.19
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
t
au
ss
Removing
Caution
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Access/Start Authorization Control
Module - J518-
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always per‐
form the work procedure as described in the repair manual.
Refer
to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
216
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Clear the vehicle floor in the front left footwell, in front of the
seat.
do
c
um
en
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
y
db
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
ise
– Remove connector
-1- from control module.
or
h
ut
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Reconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Note
♦ When disconnecting and connecting battery, the procedure as
described in the Repair Manual must be followed.
♦ If access/start authorization control module is replaced. Refer
to
⇒ “4.18 Access/Start Authorization Control Module J518 , Re‐
placing”, page 128 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Note
Driver Access/Start Authorization An‐
tenna
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.20
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Tighten the control module nuts to 2 Nm.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
sa
– Remove snuts
-2- and remove control module.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
The antennas in the outside door handles are considered a single
antenna per vehicle side (front and rear).
Removing
– Remove front driver side door handle. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 57 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove rear driver side door handle. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 58 ; Removal and Installation .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
5.21
Front Passenger Access/Start Authori‐
zation Antenna
Removing
– Remove front passenger side door handle. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 57 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove rear passenger side door handle. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 58 ; Removal and Installation .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
5.22
Access/Start Authorization Antenna in
Rear Bumper - R136-
Access/start authorization antenna in rear bumper is in two parts
and is located on rear cross panel behind bumper cover.
5. Removal and Installation
217
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Note
pe
rm
itte
d
un
le
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
03.2016
u
ac
a
ss
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
♦ Removal of the right antenna is described in the following.
Removal of left antenna is performed in the same way.
♦ No coding, basic setting or adaptation is necessary if access/
start authorization antenna in rear bumper is replaced. Erase
any DTC entries in DTC memory under guided fault finding
using Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing And Information System VAS5051B- .
Removing
– Remove rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -1-.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Prote
cted
by
5.23
Luggage Compartment Access/Start
Authorization Antenna
Access/start authorization antenna in luggage compartment R137- is located on lower section of rear shelf.
Note
No coding, basic setting or adaptation is necessary if access/start
authorization antenna in luggage compartment is replaced. Erase
any DTC entries in DTC memory under guided fault finding using
Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing And Information System VAS5051B- .
Removing
– Remove lower section of rear shelf. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -1-.
– Remove both screws -arrows- and remove access/start au‐
thorization antenna in luggage compartment -3- from lower
section of the rear shelf -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Tighten the 4 x 14 mm screws -arrows- to 2 Nm.
218
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Tighten the 5 x 16 mm screws -arrows- to 2 Nm.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Install antenna with connector facing up and install the screws
into the spring nuts.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
do
c
um
en
– Remove the mounting bolts -arrows- and remove access/start
authorization antenna in rear bumper -2-.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
5.24
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
Phaeton
2003 ➤
ut
ra
a
c
s
Electrical Equipment - Edition
03.2016
s
Interior Access/Start Authorization An‐
tenna 1
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
The Access/Start Authorization Antenna 1 In Vehicle Interior R138- is located under shift cover at the front of the center
console.
Note
No coding, basic setting or adaptation is necessary if access/start
authorization antenna 1 in vehicle interior is replaced. Erase any
DTC entries in DTC memory under guided fault finding using VAS5051B- .
Removing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
AG.
Installing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Unclip access/start authorization antenna 1 in vehicle interior
-1- from its securing mount -2- and remove it from vehicle.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -3-.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Remove the shift cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
68 ; Removal and Installation .
– When installing, insert access/start authorization antenna 1 in
vehicle interior with rear side guide tab in first and then engage
it in gear shift cover.
5.25
Access/Start Authorization Antenna 2 in
Vehicle Interior
Access/Start Authorization Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior - R139is located in center armrest cover of rear seat bench in the 4- and
5-seat versions.
Note
No coding, basic setting or adaptation is necessary if access/start
authorization antenna 2 in vehicle interior is replaced. Erase any
DTC entries in DTC memory under guided fault finding using Ve‐
hicle Diagnosis, Testing And Information System - VAS5051B- .
Removing
Access/start authorization antenna 2 in vehicle interior is a per‐
manent component of center armrest cover of rear seat bench in
the 4- and 5-seat versions and cannot be replaced separately. In
the event of repairs, replace complete rear center armrest.
4-seater:
– Remove rear center armrest. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 74 ; Removal and Installation .
5-seater:
– Remove rear center armrest. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 74 ; Removal and Installation .
5. Removal and Installation
219
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Re-attach harness connector of access/start authorization an‐
tenna 2 in vehicle interior to connector bracket on rear wall
after connecting.
5.26
Interior Access/Start Authorization An‐
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
tenna 3
es n
wage
o
olks
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
V
by
ed - R154Access/Start Authorization Antenna 3 In Vehicle Interior
ris
o
h
is located in wiring on center tunnel at rear.
ut
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Note
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
ss
Removing
4-seater:
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
No coding, basic setting or adaptation is necessary if access/start
authorization antenna 3 in vehicle interior is replaced. Erase any
DTC entries in DTC memory under guided fault finding using Ve‐
hicle Diagnosis, Testing And Information System - VAS5051B- .
– Remove center console extension. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
– Free up vehicle floor in area of center tunnel far enough in front
of rear seat heel panel until wiring on center tunnel is acces‐
sible.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
Make sure that electrical wire for antenna is not jammed when
installing.
– Tighten the 4 x 16 mm screws -2- to 2 Nm.
220
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -1- and remove
access/start authorization antenna 3 in vehicle interior -3- from
vehicle.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove the both mounting bolts -2- and remove access/start
authorization antenna 3 in vehicle interior -3- upward from wir‐
ing -1-.
do
c
um
en
– Free up vehicle floor in area of center tunnel far enough in front
of rear seat heel panel until wiring on center tunnel is acces‐
sible.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5-seater:
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
5.27
Parking Aid
⇒ “5.27.1 Parking Aid Control Module J446 ”, page 221
⇒ “5.27.2 Front Parking Aid Sensors”, page 221
⇒ “5.27.3 Rear Parking Aid Sensors”, page 222
⇒ “5.27.4 Front Parking Aid Display”, page 222
⇒ “5.27.5 Rear Parking Aid Display Y15 ”, page 223
⇒ “5.27.6 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15 ”, page 223
⇒ “5.27.7 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer”, page 224
5.27.1
Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
The parking aid control module is located in the luggage com‐
partment under the rear shelf.
r
fo
ng
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Remove hat self lower section. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
– Remove both bolts -arrows-.
– Release and disconnect connectors.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
– Tighten both screws on the control module to 2 Nm.
5.27.2
Front Parking Aid Sensors
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Release Tool - T10345Removing
Caution
♦ Always follow the sensor removal sequence.
♦ Otherwise, the sensor may be damaged. Hairline cracks
which lead to sensor failure can develop if too much force
is used on the sensor.
♦ First remove the sensor from the bracket and then dis‐
connect the sensor connectors.
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
5. Removal and Installation
221
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage retaining tabs -arrows- with -T10345- and remove
sensor with connector connected from bumper cover.
– Release and disconnect connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Release Tool - T10345-
Caution
♦ Always follow the sensor removal sequence.
♦ Otherwise, the sensor may be damaged. Hairline cracks
which lead to sensor failure can develop if too much force
is used on the sensor.
♦ First remove the sensor from the bracket and then dis‐
connect the sensor connectors.
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Disengage retaining tabs -arrows- with -T10345- and remove
sensor with connector connected from bumper cover.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Release and disconnect connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
5.27.4
Front Parking Aid Display
The Left Front Parking Aid Display - Y13- and Right Front Parking
Aid Display - Y14- are installed in the instrument panel cover un‐
der the windshield on the left and right side. Removing and
installing the right or left display is identical.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the front cover on the instrument panel.
222
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Removing
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Rear Parking Aid Sensors
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
5.27.3
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Turn the cover over and loosen both bolts -arrows- for the
parking aid display.
– Disconnect the connector and remove the front parking aid
display.
Installing
pe
rm
itte
d
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
5.27.5
Rear Parking Aid Display - Y15es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
The display for the rear parking aid is installed in the roof trim
panel above the rear window. The display is positioned in such a
way that the driver can see it in the exterior rearview mirror when
backing up.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Install in reverse order of removal.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Pry the parking aid -arrows- out of the roof trim panel with a
small screwdriver.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
5.27.6
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Disconnect the connector and remove the rear parking aid
display.
Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -H15-
There are three warning buzzers to provide warning signals for
the parking aid. The two rear warning buzzers are on the C-pillars
behind the trim; the front warning buzzer is on the left side behind
the instrument cluster above the relay carrier.
The two rear warning buzzers are located on the C-pillars behind
the trim.
Note
Removing and installing the right warning buzzer is described.
Removing and installing the left buzzer is identical.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the lower C-pillar trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
5. Removal and Installation
223
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -1-.
– Remove the expanding rivets -2- and remove the Rear Parking
Aid Warning Buzzer - H15- .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
5.27.7
Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer
The Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- is located behind
the instrument cluster on the left side, above the relay carrier.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the instrument cluster. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Instrument Cluster”, page 52 .
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
Installing
pe
rm
itte
d
– Release and disconnect electrical connection -arrow- and re‐
move front parking aid warning buzzer -1- from vehicle.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Remove both rivet pins -arrows- and remove the front parking
aid warning buzzer -1- while being careful of connected lines.
Install in reverse order of removal.
The left Lane Change Assistance Control Module - J769- or right
Lane Change Assistance Control Module 2 - J770- is combined
into one unit with the radar sensor for the respective side. The
lane change assistance control modules are located at the left
and right behind the bumper cover.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
224
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Lane Change Assistance Control Mod‐
ule with Radar Sensor
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
5.28
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Note
♦ If both lane change assistance control modules or only the left
lane change assistance control module (master) is replaced,
the lane change assistance system must be first coded. Refer
to
⇒ “4.26.6 Lane Change Assistance Control Module , Coding”,
page 138 and then calibrated after completing the assembly
work. Refer to
⇒ “4.26.1 Lane Change Assist, Calibrating”, page 131
♦ If only the (right) lane change assistance control module 2
(slave) is changed, the lane change assistance system only
has to be calibrated. Refer to
⇒ “4.26.1 Lane Change Assist, Calibrating”, page 131 after
completing the assembly work.
Removing
Note
AG. Volkswagen
The following describes the removal and installation
agen of the right AG does
ksw
not
l
o
lane change assistance control module 2.byThe
same
procedure
V
gu
ara
d
is used to remove and install the left lane
nte
ise change assistance con‐
r
o
eo
h
trol module is done in the same way.
ut
r
ac
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
ss
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Remove rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -2-.
– Remove three mounting bolts -arrows- and remove lane
change assistance control module -3- from bracket -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– After installing, calibrate the lane change assist. Refer to
⇒ “4.26.1 Lane Change Assist, Calibrating”, page 131 .
Note
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ If only the (right) lane change assistance control module 2
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
lane change assistance control module (master) is replaced,
the lane change assistance system must be first coded. Refer
to
⇒ “4.26.6 Lane Change Assistance Control Module , Coding”,
page 138 and then calibrated. Refer to
⇒ “4.26.1 Lane Change Assist, Calibrating”, page 131 after
completing the assembly work.
do
c
um
en
♦ If both lane change assistance control modules or only the left
(slave) is changed, the lane change assistance system only
has to be calibrated. Refer to
⇒ “4.26.1 Lane Change Assist, Calibrating”, page 131 after
completing the assembly work.
5. Removal and Installation
225
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Volkswagen AG
AG.03.2016
Electrical Equipment - Edition
do
agen
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
w
olks
yV
b
ed
ris
ho
t
au
Note
The brightness of the warning lights when operating depends on
the brightness of the surroundings and is controlled via the rain
and light sensor.
Removing
– Remove the mirror glass. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Removal and Installation
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -1-.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Note
In the case of one or more faulty LEDs, the lane change assis‐
tance warning lamp in driver exterior rearview mirror must be
completely replaced.
WARNING
Risk of slivers
The mirror glass can break.
Wear protective gloves when carrying out this work.
Note
Make sure to press only in mirror center.
– Attach mirror glass at mirror adjusting unit and press on mirror
glass.
5.30
Rearview Camera System Control Mod‐
ule - J772-
The rearview camera control module is located in the luggage
compartment under the rear shelf.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
226
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
– Release retaining tab -arrow A- and press lane change assis‐
tance warning lamp in driver exterior rearview mirror -2- out‐
ward out of mirror housing -arrow B-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
The same procedure is used to remove and install the Lane
Change Assistance Warning Lamp In Driver Exterior Rearview
Mirror - K233- and Lane Change Assistance Warning Lamp In
Front Passenger Exterior Rearview Mirror - K234- . The illustra‐
tions only show the procedure for one side.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Lane Change Assistance Exterior Rear‐
view
Mirror Warning Lamp
ss
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
5.29
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage the rear self lower section. Refer to ⇒ Body Inte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disconnect both connectors -2- and -3-.
– Push both tabs -arrows- outward and pull the rearview camera
-1- out of its mount.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Only if the control module has been replaced.
– Calibrate the system again. Refer to
⇒ “4.27.2 Rearview Camera System, Calibrating”, page 138 .
5.31
Rearview Camera
The Rearview Camera - R189- is installed above the license plate
depression in the rear bumper cover.
Removing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers
and re‐
Vol
by
d
move ignition key.
e
s
i
r
ho
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
t
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer
to ⇒ Body Exterior;
au
ss
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Removal and Installation
.
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
– Disconnect the connector -1- on the rearview camera -2-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note
When removing and installing components in a visible area
(switches, covers, trim, etc.), mask off the areas at which a prying
tool ( -3409- , screwdriver) will be positioned, using commercially
available adhesive tape.
– Carefully remove the rearview camera with a thin screwdriver
from the bumper cover.
Install in reverse order of removal, noting the following:
AG.
Prote
cted
by
5.32
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Calibrate the system again. Refer to
⇒ “4.27.2 Rearview Camera System, Calibrating”, page 138 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– After installing, clean the rear view camera lens using a lintfree cloth.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
Installing
Driver Assistance Systems Front Cam‐
era - R242-
Removing
– Switch all electrical consumers off and remove ignition key.
– Remove the key.
5. Removal and Installation
227
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the camera cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
68 ; Removal and Installation
– Disconnect the connector -1– Loosen the driver assistance systems front camera out of the
tabs on interior rearview mirror -arrows-.
– Remove the driver assistance systems front camera.
Installing
Install in reverse order. Note the following:
Note
When installing the driver assistance systems front camera, make
sure the camera -arrows- fits correctly into the guides.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Install the camera cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
68 ; Removal and Installation .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
Rep. Gr.tho
eo
u
ra
a
c
s
s
5.33
Directional Stabilization Assistance
Windshield Heater
The Directional Stabilization Assistance Windshield Defogger Z67- is integrated in the bonded carrier plate in the windshield. It
cannot be replaced separately. The windshield must be replaced
if there is damage.
5.34
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
⇒ “5.34.1 Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Module J502 ”, page
228
Note
If the tire pressure monitoring control module must be replaced,
first get the coding from the old control module before removing
it, and then code the new control module. Refer to
⇒ “4.29 Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Module J502 , Coding”,
page 143 .
228
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Control Mod‐
ule - J502-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
5.34.1
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “5.34.4 Tire Pressure Sensors”, page 229
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
⇒ “5.34.3 Transmitters in Wheel Housing”, page 229
r
fo
ng
⇒ “5.34.2 Tire Pressure Monitoring Antennas R207 ”,
page 229
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
– Calibrate the driver assistance systems front camera. Refer to
⇒ “4.28.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera, Calibrat‐
ing”, page 143 .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
The tire pressure monitoring control module -arrow- is located in
the luggage compartment on the left side, under the E-box.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the luggage compartment left trim panel. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Press the tab -arrow- and remove the tire pressure monitoring
control module -1- from its mount. Pay attention the wires still
connected to it.
– Disconnect the connector -2- and remove the control module
-1-.
Installing
nA
wage
olks
V
by
ed
ris
o
th
au
ss
Tire Pressure Monitoring Antennas R207-
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
5.34.2
AG do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Install in reverse order of removal.
G. Volkswagen
– Tire pressure monitoring antennas, removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Re‐
moval and Installation .
5.34.3
Transmitters in Wheel Housing
♦ Left Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G431- removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Removal and Installation
♦ Right Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G432- removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Removal and Installation
♦ Left Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G433- removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Removal and Installation
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Tire Pressure Sensors
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
5.34.4
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
♦ Right Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Transmitter In Wheel
Housing - G434- removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Removal and Installation
– Tire pressure sensors, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒
Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Removal and
Installation .
5. Removal and Installation
229
AG.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
6
Disassembly and Assembly
⇒ “6.1 Steering Column Switch”, page 230
6.1
Steering Column Switch
Disassembling
– Remove steering column switch. Refer to
⇒ “5.16 Steering Column Switch”, page 212 .
– Remove both screws -arrows- on the tiptronic switches.
– Remove both bolts -arrows- on the tiptronic switches.
r
fo
ng
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
230
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
– Carefully set aside the holder -2- with the tiptronic multi-pin
connector -3-.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
–
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
hretainer -arrow- on the spiral spring multi-pin con‐
Release the
t
or
u
ac
a
nector -1-.
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Release the retainer -arrows- on the bridge of the right tiptronic
switch.
– Carefully move the bridge for the right tiptronic switch to the
side.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
– Release the retainer -arrows- on the bridge of the left tiptronic
switch and remove the entire tiptronic switch.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Carefully remove the airbag spiral spring with the Steering
Angle Sensor - G85- from the steering column switch.
– Remove the screws -2-.
– Remove the windshield wiper switch.
– To remove the turn signal switch, remove the screws -1-.
Assemble in reverse order of disassembly, observing the follow‐
ing:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Assembling:
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove the Steering Column Electronic Systems Control
Module - J527- from the turn signal switch.
do
c
um
en
– Remove the turn signal switch.
AG.
Note
♦ If steering column electronic systems control module is re‐
placed, it must be coded. Refer to
⇒ “4.15 Steering Column Electronic Systems Control Module,
Coding”, page 126 .
♦ Make sure wires are routed correctly inside the steering col‐
umn switch.
6. Disassembly and Assembly
231
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
7
Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
r
fo
ng
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
AG.
232
agen
lksw
Vo
by
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1410-
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1331-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
♦ Calibration Tool - VAS6350-
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
♦ Diagnostic Cable - VAS 5051/6A-
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
♦ Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information System VAS5051B-
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
♦ Release Lever - T10039-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
♦ Socket Tool - T10152-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
♦ Heat Gun - VAG1416-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
♦ Release Tool - T10345-
7. Special Tools
233
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition
Volkswagen A
AG. 03.2016
s
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
General Information
⇒ “1.1 Cigarette Lighter U1 ”, page 234
⇒ “1.2 Interior Lamps and Switches”, page 234
⇒ “1.3 Switch Unit, Rear Seat Adjustment, 4-Seater”, page 234
⇒ “1.4 Switch Unit for Front Seat Heating/Ventilation with Buttons
for Dampening, ESP, and Level Control in Center Console”, page
235
⇒ “1.5 Switch Unit for Rear Seat Position and Heating/Ventilation
Memory, 4-Seater”, page 235
1.1
Cigarette Lighter - U1-
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in ⇒
Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; General
Information
r
fo
ng
Interior Lamps and Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Note
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
1.2
When removing and installing components in a visible area
(switches, covers, trim, etc.), mask off the areas at which a prying
tool ( -3409- , screwdriver) will be positioned, using commercially
available adhesive tape.
AG.
1.3
Switch Unit, Rear Seat Adjustment, 4Seater
The switch panel for rear seat adjustment consists of the following
components:
♦ Left Rear Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button - E416♦ Right Rear Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button - E417♦ Left Rear Seat Forward/Back Adjustment Button - E419♦ Right Rear Seat Forward/Back Adjustment Button - E420♦ Left Rear Seat Lumbar Support Height Adjustment Button E343♦ Right Rear Seat Lumbar Support Height Adjustment Button E344♦ Left Rear Seat Lumbar Support Forward/Back Adjustment
Button - E345♦ Right Rear Seat Lumbar Support Forward/Back Adjustment
Button - E346♦ Front Passengers Seat Remote Control Button - E351-
234
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
1
G do
es n
ot g
ua
ran
tee
or
ac
Interior
Lights, Switches
s
un
le
96 –
n
wage
olks
V
by
ed
ris
o
th
au
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
1.4
Switch Unit for Front Seat Heating/Ven‐
tilation with Buttons for Dampening,
ESP, and Level Control in Center Con‐
sole
The switch unit for front seat heating/ventilation with buttons for
dampening, ESP, and level control consists of the following com‐
ponents:
♦ Seat Heating/Ventilation Adjuster - E399- , left
♦ Seat Heating/Ventilation Adjuster - E399- , right
♦ Dampening Adjustment Button - E387♦ ASR/ESP Button - E256♦ Level Control Button - E388-
1.5
Switch Unit for Rear Seat Position and
Heating/Ventilation Memory, 4-Seater
The switch panel for rear seat position and heating/ventilation
memory consists of the following components:
♦ Seat Position Memory Button - E447♦ Left Rear Memory Seat Positions 1 And 2 Button - E348n AG. Volkswagen AG o
♦ Right Rear Memory Seat Positions
es
wage 1 And 2 Button -dE349ks
Vol
by
♦ Left Rear Seat Massage
ed Button - E409-
is
or
th
♦ Right Rear Seat Massage
Button - E410au
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
♦ Right Rear Seat Heating/Ventilation Adjuster - E414-
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ss
♦ Left Rear Seat Heating/Ventilation Adjuster - E413-
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
1. General Information
235
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2
Removal and Installation
⇒ “2.1 Left and Right Rear Footwell Lamps”, page 236
⇒ “2.2 Front Door Lamps and Switches”, page 236
⇒ “2.3 Rear Door Lamps and Switches”, page 243
⇒ “2.4 Instrument Panel Lamps and Switches”, page 247
⇒ “2.5 Luggage Compartment Lamps and Switches”, page 253
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is262
Switches”, page
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
⇒ “2.6 Roof Trim Lamps and Switches”, page 255
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
⇒ “2.8 Horn”, page 266
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
⇒ “2.7 Center Console Lamps and
⇒ “2.9 Low Tone Horn H7 ”, page 267
2.1
Left and Right Rear Footwell Lamps
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Removing and installing the Left Rear Footwell Illumination Bulb
- L106- or the Right Rear Footwell Illumination Bulb - L107- is
identical to removing the front footwell lamps. Refer to
⇒ “2.4.7 Left and Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulbs L151 /
L152 ”, page 251 .
2.2
Front Door Lamps and Switches
⇒ “2.2.1 Central Switch for Window Regulator, Rear Lid Remote
Control Lock Switch and Fuel Tank Lid Unlock Button”,
page 236
⇒ “2.2.2 Right Front Window Switch E41 ”, page 237
⇒ “2.2.4 Driver and Front Passenger Door Opener Illumination
Bulb L108 / L109 ”, page 239
2.2.1
Central Switch for Window Regulator,
Rear Lid Remote Control Lock Switch
and Fuel Tank Lid Unlock Button
The central window regulator switch in the driver door, the switch
for the rear lid remote control lock and the fuel tank lid unlock
button are all together in a single switch module installed inside
the driver door.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the driver door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
236
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
AG.
⇒ “2.2.7 Driver Door Warning Lamp W30 and Front Passenger
Door Warning Lamp W36 ”, page 241
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “2.2.6 Left and Right Front Entry Lamps”, page 240
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
⇒ “2.2.5 Driver Door Contact Switch and Front Passenger Door
Contact Switch”, page 240
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
⇒ “2.2.3 Driver and Front Passenger Interior Locking Button
E308 / E309 ”, page 238
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Loosen the threaded connection -1- and disconnect the con‐
nector -2-.
– Disconnect the door warning lamp connector.
– Remove the screws -1- and loosen the threaded connections
-2-.
– Remove the armrest from the door trim panel.
– Remove the screws -1- and unlock the tabs -2-.
– Remove the switch module from the armrest.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Right Front Window Switch - E41-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
2.2.2
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
The right front window regulator switch is installed in the right door
trim panel.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully pry out the switch with a screwdriver.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2. Removal and Installation
237
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
Installing
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Install in reverse order of removal.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Driver and Front Passenger Interior
Locking Button - E308- / -E309-
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
2.2.3
The front interior locking buttons are installed in the decorative
trim strip in the door trim panel. Removing and installation is the
same for all buttons and is described here for only one button.
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
AG.
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
238
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Release and remove speaker connector -1- (if present), inte‐
rior lock switch connector -2- and door handle lighting con‐
nector -3-.
do
c
um
en
– Use the -3409- to pry the trim strip from the door panel
-arrows-.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Release retaining tabs -arrows- and remove interior lock
switch.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.2.4
Driver and Front Passenger Door Open‐
er Illumination Bulb - L108- / -L109-
Removing and installation is the same for both driver and pas‐
senger side lights and is described here for only one light.
Note
♦ The front door opener illumination is connected to the door
opener cover. If a repair is required, the entire door opener
panel must be replaced.
AG. Volkswagen A
o
gu
yV
panel also contains a mid-range
speaker. It is permanentlyt at‐
ara
db
e
nte
s
i
tached to the door opener
panel.
If
a
repair
is
required,
the
r
o
eo
h
t
door opener panelautogether
with the mid-range speaker must
ra
c
s
s
be replaced.
♦ In vehicles with the standard sound system, the door opener
panel only has a speaker cover.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Removing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the trim from the door panel.
Remove the driver door trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 ; Removal and Installation .
Remove the passenger door trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Separate the connector -1- for the interior lock button as well
as the connector -2- for the door opener light.
Only Vehicles with the Premium Sound System.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
G do
gen system, the door
es n
♦ In vehicles with the premium lksound
opener
swa
o
2. Removal and Installation
239
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Separate the connector for the mid-range speaker -arrow-.
pe
rm
itte
d
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
Installing
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Remove the bolts -arrows- and remove the door opener panel.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Continuation for All Vehicles
Install in reverse order of removal.
Driver Door Contact Switch and Front
Passenger Door Contact Switch
The door contact switches are integrated into the door lock and
cannot be replaced separately.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Replace the respective door lock. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 57 ; Removal and Installation .
Left and Right Front Entry Lamps
AG.
2.2.6
The front entry lamps are installed in the bottom of the door trim
panel. Removal and installation is the same for both entry lights
and is described here for only one light.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Pry the lamp -arrow- with a screwdriver out of the door trim
panel and pull it out. Pay attention to the wires still connected.
240
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
The entire door lock must always be replaced if door contact
switch is malfunctioning.
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
2.2.5
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
Bulb, Replacing
– Carefully pry the lens off the entry lamp -arrow-.
– Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
Entry lamps: 12V, 6W bulb
Installing
Driver Door Warning Lamp - W30- and
Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp W36-
The door warning lights are installed in the side of the door trim
panels. Removal and installation is the same for both front door
warning lights and is described here for only one light.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove door trim.
Remove the driver door trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 ; Removal and Installation .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
Remove the passenger door trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
2.2.7
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Install in reverse order of removal.
2. Removal and Installation
241
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
– Remove the nuts -arrows- for the trim.
– Carefully remove the trim from the door panel.
olkswagen AG
en AG. V
does
ag
– Remove the door warningolight
no
lksw in direction of -arrow-.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
242
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Install in reverse
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
yV
db
ise
r
tho
au of removal.
order
s
s
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.3
Rear Door Lamps and Switches
⇒ “2.3.1 Left Rear Power Window Switch in Left Rear Door E52
and Right Rear Window Switch in Right Rear Door E54 ”,
page 243
⇒ “2.3.2 Left Rear Interior Locking Button E310 and Right Rear
Interior Locking Button E311 ”, page 243
⇒ “2.3.3 Left and Right Rear Door Opener Illumination Bulb L110 /
L111 ”, page 244
⇒ “2.3.4 Left and Right Rear Door Contact Switches”, page 245
⇒ “2.3.5 Left Rear Entry Lamp
W33 and Right Rear Entry Lamp
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
W34 ”, page 245 lkswagen
n
ot g
u
o
yV
ara
db
eRear
⇒ “2.3.6 Left
Door Warning Lamp W37 and Right
nteRear Door
ris
o
eo
WarninguLamp
W38 ”, page 246
th
r
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
un
le
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ac
Left Rear Power Window Switch in Left
Rear Door - E52- and Right Rear Win‐
dow Switch in Right Rear Door - E54-
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
ss
2.3.1
The rear window switches are installed in each door trim panel.
Removal and installation is the same for both switches and is de‐
scribed here for only one switch.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Carefully pry out the switch with a screwdriver.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
AG.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.3.2
Left Rear Interior Locking Button - E310and Right Rear Interior Locking Button E311-
The rear interior locking buttons are installed in each door trim
panel. Removing and installation is the same for all buttons and
is described here for only one button.
2. Removal and Installation
243
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Use the -3409- to pry the trim strip from the door panel
-arrows-.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Release and remove speaker connector -1- (if present), inte‐
rior lock switch connector -2- and door handle lighting con‐
nector -3-.
– Open the tabs -arrows- and remove the interior lock switches.
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.3.3
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
Installing
Left and Right Rear Door Opener Illumi‐
nation Bulb - L110- / -L111-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Note
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
The rear door opener illumination is installed in the trim on the
door trim panel. Removal and installation is the same for both rear
door opener lights and is described here for only one light.
The rear door opener lighting is permanently attached to the door
opener panel. If a repair is required, the entire door opener panel
must be replaced.
244
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the trim on the door panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disconnect the connectors -1- for the interior lock button and
the door opener illumination -2-.
–
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t bolts -arrows- and remove the door opener panel.
Remove the
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Install in reverse order of removal.
Left and Right Rear Door Contact
Switches
The door contact switches are integrated into the door lock and
cannot be replaced separately.
The entire door lock must always be replaced if door contact
switch is malfunctioning.
– Replace the respective door lock. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 58 ; Removal and Installation .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Left Rear Entry Lamp - W33- and Right
Rear Entry Lamp - W34agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
2.3.5
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
2.3.4
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Installing
The rear entry lamps are installed in the bottom of the door trim
panel. Removal and installation is the same for both entry lights
and is described here for only one light.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
2. Removal and Installation
245
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Press the tabs -arrow- and remove the lamp from the door trim
panel.
– Disengage and
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Bulb, Replacing
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h harness connector -arrow-.
t
disconnect
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Carefully pry off the interior lamp lens -arrow-.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.3.6
Left Rear Door Warning Lamp - W37and Right Rear Door Warning Lamp W38-
The door warning lamps are installed in the bottom of the door
trim panel. Removal and installation is the same for both rear door
warning lights and is only described here for one light.
246
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Entry lights: 12V, 6W bulb
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
– Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all
move ignition key.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
electrical
is consumers and re‐
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Remove the door panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Release the retaining tabs -arrows- and remove the door
warning light.
Install in reverse order of removal.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
2.4
do
c
um
en
Installing
Instrument Panel Lamps and Switches
⇒ “2.4.1 Light Switch E1 ”, page 247
⇒ “2.4.2 Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimmer Switch
E20 and Trip Odometer Reset Switch E123 ”, page 248
⇒ “2.4.3 Rear Window Shade Switch E149 and Parking Aid But‐
ton E266 ”, page 249
⇒ “2.4.4 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 ”, page 250
⇒ “2.4.5 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch”, page 250
⇒ “2.4.6 Steering Column Adjustment Switch”, page 251
⇒ “2.4.7 Left and Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulbs L151 /
L152 ”, page 251
⇒ “2.4.8 Radio Frequency Controlled Clock Y8 ”, page 252
⇒ “2.4.9 Front Sill Panel Trim Ambient Lighting Fiber Optic Cable”,
page 253
2.4.1
Light Switch - E1-
Note
When removing and installing components in a visible area
(switches, covers, trim, etc.), mask off the areas at which a prying
tool ( -3409- , screwdriver) will be positioned, using commercially
available adhesive tape.
2. Removal and Installation
247
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully release the light switch retaining tabs -arrows- with
a screwdriver.
– Remove the light switch from instrument panel.
– Release and disconnect connectors.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Instrument Panel and Switch Illumina‐
tion Dimmer Switch - E20- and Trip Od‐
ometer Reset Switch - E123-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
The instrument panel and switch illumination dimmer switch and
the trip odometer reset button are together in a single switch
module, located on the left side next to the instrument cluster in
the instrument panel.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the switch cover -arrows- with a screwdriver.
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
248
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2.4.2
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
The light switch is installed in the instrument panel next to the
steering wheel.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
Phaeton 2003 ➤auth
ra
c
s
s
Electrical Equipment
- Edition 03.2016
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Pull out the switch -1- in direction of -arrow- and disconnect
the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.4.3
Rear Window Shade Switch - E149- and
Parking Aid Button - E266-
The rear window shade switch and the are contained in a single
switch module on the right side next to the instrument cluster in
the instrument panel.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Remove bolts -arrows-.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Remove the switch cover -arrows- with a screwdriver.
2. Removal and Installation
249
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Pull out the switch -1- in direction of -arrow- and disconnect
the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.4.4
Glove Compartment Lamp - W6-
The glove compartment lamp is installed inside the glove com‐
partment.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
olkswagen AG
– Carefully pry out the lens with a screwdriver -arrow-.
en AG. V
ag
lksw
o
– Pull out the lens and the bulb holder.
Pay
y V attention to the wires
db
e
s
still connected.
i
or
h
ut
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
un
le
pe
rm
itte
d
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
Bulb, Replacing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
– Disconnect the connector and
ss remove the glove compartment
lamp.
does
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
– Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
Glove compartment light: 12V, 6W bulb
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Glove Compartment Lamp Switch
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
AG.
250
agen
lksw
Vo
by
The Glove Compartment Lamp Switch - E26- is installed on the
back of the glove compartment.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2.4.5
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
After the glove compartment light has been serviced, a functional
test of the switch must be performed. The bulb must not be lit
when the lid is closed!
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Note
♦ The illustration shows the switch -1- with the instrument panel
removed. The instrument panel does not need to be removed
in order to remove and install the switch.
♦ The switch -1- is accessible from the footwell and can be un‐
clipped.
. Volkswagen AG
♦ The wiring to the switch -1- is long enough to pull the switch
gen AG
does
swa
lk con‐
with connected wiring into the footwell and separate
Vothe
by
d
e
nector.
ris
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Removing
ho
ut
a
ss
not
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
– Pull the switch -1- downward and out from behind the instru‐
ment panel -arrow B- and separate the connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.4.6
Steering Column Adjustment Switch
The Steering Column Adjustment Switch - E167- is installed in the
lower half of the steering column trim.
r
fo
ng
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Separate the connector -1- from the switch.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to
⇒ “5.16 Steering Column Switch”, page 212 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Removing
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
– Unclip the switch -1- with connected wiring from the holder
-arrows A-.
– Remove screw -2-.
– Push the switch inward -arrow- out of the trim.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.4.7
Left and Right Front Footwell Illumina‐
tion Bulbs - L151- / -L152-
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
2. Removal and Installation
251
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Using a suitable screwdriver, carefully pry out the lamp
-arrow-.
– Disconnect the connector and remove the bulb.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Bulb, Replacing
– Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
Footwell lamp: 12V, 6W bulb
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Switch off ignition and remove ignition key.
– Pull the radio frequency controlled clock -arrows- from its re‐
tainer.
252
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Open the air vents in the instrument panel. Refer to Operating
instructions 3.1.2 Phaeton, Infotainment operation.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
The radio frequency controlled clock is installed in the center of
the instrument panel.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Radio Frequency Controlled Clock - Y8-
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
2.4.8
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Press the retaining tab -arrow- and release the connector.
– Separate the connector -1- from the radio frequency controlled
clock.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.4.9
Front Sill Panel Trim Ambient Lighting
Fiber Optic Cable
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Removing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
Note
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t of the vehicle is descri‐
u
Removing and installing on the left side
ra
a
c
s
bed. Removing and installing on thes right side is identical.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– A-pillar lower trim, driver side, removing. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Removal and Installation .
The illuminated door sill panel -1- does not have regular bulbs,
but rather a wiring harness -2- with an LED.
It is not possible to service it. If damaged, then the illuminated
door sill panel must be replaced.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
⇒ “2.5.2 Luggage Compartment Lamp Switch F5 ”, page 254
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
⇒ “2.5.1 Left Luggage Compartment Lamp W18 and Right Lug‐
gage Compartment Lamp W35 ”, page 253
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Luggage Compartment Lamps and
Switches
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
2.5
⇒ “2.5.3 Rear Lid Lock Button In Luggage Compartment E406 ”,
page 254
2.5.1
Left Luggage Compartment Lamp W18- and Right Luggage Compartment
Lamp - W35-
The left and right luggage compartment lamps are installed in the
luggage compartment side trim panels. Removal and installation
is the same for both luggage compartment lights and is only de‐
scribed for one of the lights.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
2. Removal and Installation
253
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Carefully pry the lamp out of the trim panel with a screwdriver.
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Carefully pry the glass-based bulb from the socket.
Luggage compartment lamp: 12V, 6W bulb
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Luggage Compartment Lamp Switch F5r
fo
ng
The luggage compartment light switch is integrated into the rear
lid lock and cannot be replaced separately.
Rear Lid Lock Button In Luggage Com‐
partment - E406-
The rear lid lock button is installed on the bottom of the rear lid.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
254
Prote
cted
by
2.5.3
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
AG.
– Replacing rear lid lock. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
55 ; Removal and Installation .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
The entire rear lid lock must be replaced if the luggage compart‐
ment light switch is faulty.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2.5.2
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Bulb, Replacing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
– Pry the button out with a screwdriver.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen Electrical Equipment
oes - Edition 03.2016
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
ara
db
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Roof Trim Lamps and Switches
do
c
um
en
2.6
⇒ “2.6.1 Front Interior Lamp W1 ”, page 255
⇒ “2.6.2 Driver Reading Lamp W19 and Front Passenger Read‐
ing Lamp W13 ”, page 257
⇒ “2.6.3 Sunroof Switch E8 ”, page 258
⇒ “2.6.4 Rear Interior and Reading Lights”, page 258
⇒ “2.6.5 Rear Interior Lamp Button E327 and Rear Reading Lamp
Button E329 ”, page 260
⇒ “2.6.6 Garage Door Opener Control Module”, page 260
⇒ “2.6.7 Switch Panel in Roof Module”, page 261
2.6.1
Front Interior Lamp - W1-
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Pry out the interior lamp lens -arrow-.
2. Removal and Installation
255
– Remove screws -arrows-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Unclip the interior lamp from the roof trim panel -arrow-.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Disconnect the connectors -arrows-.
256
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Pull the interior lamp forward -arrow- from the roof trim panel.
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
ran
Phaeton 2003 ➤ rised
tee
o
h
t
or
Electrical Equipment
- Edition 03.2016
u
ac
a
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Open the tabs -1- and remove the control module for the elec‐
tric sun shade -2-.
– Disengage and disconnect harness connector -arrow-.
– Remove the interior lamp.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Bulb, Replacing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Pry out the interior lamp lens -arrow-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Remove the bulbs -arrows- from the socket.
Front interior lamp: tubular bulb 12V, 6W
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Removing
Driver Reading Lamp - W19- and Front
Passenger Reading Lamp - W13-
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2.6.2
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
– Remove front interior light. Refer to
⇒ “2.6.1 Front Interior Lamp W1 ”, page 255 .
2. Removal and Installation
257
AG.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Bulb, Replacing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Carefully remove glass socket lamp out of sockets.
Front reading lamps: 12V, 6W bulb
Installing
Prote
cted
by
– Remove front interior light. Refer to
⇒ “2.6.1 Front Interior Lamp W1 ”, page 255 .
– Release the retaining tabs -arrows- and remove the sunroof
switch.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.6.4
Rear Interior and Reading Lights
The vehicle is equipped with the following interior and reading
lights:
♦ Left Rear Interior Light - W47♦ Right Rear Interior Light - W48♦ Left Rear Reading Lamp - W11♦ Right Rear Reading Lamp - W12-
258
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
AG.
Removing
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Sunroof Switch - E8-
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
2.6.3
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
Install in reverse order of removal.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
– Turn the bulb sockets -arrows- 90
move the sockets with the bulbs.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
e
nte
degrees to othe
ris left and re‐
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Note
The interior and reading lights may remain in the roof trim when
replacing the bulbs. bulbs, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ page 259
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Pry off and remove the interior lamp cover -arrows-.
– Carefully pry off the interior lamp lens -arrows-.
– Release and disconnect connector.
Replace Bulbs
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Remove the screws -arrows- and remove the complete interior
lamp.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
2. Removal and Installation
259
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Replace bulbs -1- (12V, 6 W).
– Unclip the interior lamp lens -2- and remove the bulb from the
socket.
Rear interior and reading lamps: 12V, 6W bulb
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.6.5
Rear Interior Lamp Button - E327- and
Rear Reading Lamp Button - E329-
Removing
– Remove the rear interior light. Refer to
⇒ “2.6.4 Rear Interior and Reading Lights”, page 258 .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
pe
rm
itte
d
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Remove the screws -arrows- on the back of the interior lamp.
Remove the interior lamp frame -1- from the bulb holder -2-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
Installing
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
– Disconnect the connector -1- and remove the screws -2-.
Install in reverse order of removal.
The Garage Door Opener Control Module - J530- is located in
interior rearview mirror cover and the operating buttons are in the
switch unit in the roof.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Garage door opener control module, removing and installing. Re‐
fer to ⇒ “2.6.6 Garage Door Opener Control Module”, page 260 .
AG.
Operating buttons in switch unit in roof, removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ “2.6.7 Switch Panel in Roof Module”, page 261 .
260
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
Note
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
Garage Door Opener Control Module
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
2.6.6
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the cover of the interior mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
olkswagen AG
en AG. V
doe
wag
– Depending on vehicle equipment,
olksseparate all connectors. s no
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Remove the screws -arrows- and remove the garage door
opener control module from the cover.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Switch Panel in Roof Module
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Prote
cted
by
2.6.7
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
yV
db
ise
r
tho
au
s
s
Depending on vehicle equipment, the switch panel in the roof
module consists of the following components:
AG.
♦ Driver Reading Lamp Button - E457♦ Front Passenger Reading Lamp Button - E458♦ Central Interior Lighting Switch-Off Button - E390♦ Front Interior Lamp Button - E326♦ Interior Monitoring Sensor - G273♦ Garage Door Opener Buttons - E392; E393; E394Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front interior light. Refer to
⇒ “2.6.1 Front Interior Lamp W1 ”, page 255 .
2. Removal and Installation
261
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Disconnect the connectors -arrows-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
– Remove screws -arrows-.
– Remove the switch panel from the roof trim.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
⇒ “2.7.1 Mirror Adjustment Switch E43 with Mirror Selector
Switch E48 ”, page 262
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
⇒ “2.7.2 Front Passenger Airbag Deactivation Key Switch E224
”, page 263
⇒ “2.7.3 Access/Start Authorization Button E408 ”, page 264
⇒ “2.7.4 Switch Panel for Front Seat Heating/Ventilation with But‐
tons for Dampening, ESP, and Level Control in the Center Con‐
sole”, page 264
⇒ “2.7.5 Switch Panel for Rear Seat Position and Heating/Venti‐
lation Memory (4-seater, removing and installing”, page 264
⇒ “2.7.6 Switch Panel for Rear Seat Adjustment (4-seater)”, page
265
⇒ “2.7.7 Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch Unit, Front Seats, 5Seater”, page 265
2.7.1
Mirror Adjustment Switch - E43- with
Mirror Selector Switch - E48-
The mirror adjustment switch and the mirror selector switch are
together in a single switch module, which is installed in the se‐
lector lever trim.
Removing
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove the selector lever trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
– Release and disconnect connectors.
262
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Center Console Lamps and Switches
do
c
um
en
2.7
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Release the retaining tabs -arrows- and remove the switch
from the cover.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
2.7.2
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
Front Passenger Airbag Deactivation
Key Switch - E224-
– Adjust both front seats to the most rearward position.
– Adjust the seat bottoms to the most rearward and lowest po‐
sition.
– Switch off ignition, switch off all electrical consumers and re‐
move ignition key.
– Pull the left and right side trim around the clips and out of the
brackets -arrows A-.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
– Remove the selector lever handle. Refer to ⇒ Automatic
Transmission; Rep. Gr. 37 ; Removal and Installation or ⇒
Automatic Transmission - External; Rep. Gr. 37 ; Removal
and Installation .
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
Removing
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
The front passenger airbag deactivation key switch is installed in
the selector lever trim.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– With both hands, grab under the selector lever trim
-arrows B- on the left and right and press the trim upward and
out of the retainers.
Note
First, push the rear retainers upward and pull the selector lever
trim slightly toward the rear, in order to pull the trim out from under
the instrument panel.
– Disconnect the connectors and remove the selector lever trim
from the selector lever.
2. Removal and Installation
263
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove screws -arrows-.
– Remove the key switch for switching off passenger side airbag
downward and out of the selector lever trim.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
2.7.3
Access/Start Authorization Button E408-
Switch Panel for Front Seat Heating/
Ventilation with Buttons for Dampening,
ESP, and Level Control in the Center
Console
Removing
– Remove the selector lever handle. Refer to ⇒ Automatic
Transmission; Rep. Gr. 37 ; Removal and Installation or ⇒
Automatic Transmission - External; Rep. Gr. 37 ; Removal
and Installation .
– Remove the selector lever trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove screws -arrows-.
– Carefully remove the switch panel downward and out from the
shifter trim.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
2.7.5
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Install in reverse order of removal.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
Switch Panel for Rear Seat Position and
Heating/Ventilation Memory (4-seater,
removing and installing
Removing
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Remove the center console extension. Refer to ⇒ Body Inte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disconnect electrical connector.
264
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
2.7.4
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Access/start authorization system button, removing and in‐
stalling ⇒ page 90 .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
The access/start authorization button is installed in the selector
lever trim.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove screws -arrows-.
– Remove the switch panel for the memory seat from the center
console extension.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Note
olkswagen AG
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always
en AG. V
gperform
does
swa
k
not
l
o
the work procedure as described in the repair manual.
Refer to
gu
yV
b
ara
d
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and ConnectingiseSequence”,
nte
r
o
eo
page 15 .
h
ut
r
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Removing
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
2.7.6
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
ss
Switch Panel for Rear Seat Adjustment
(4-seater)
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Remove the center console extension. Refer to ⇒ Body Inte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Removal and Installation .
– Disconnect electrical connector.
– Remove screws -arrows-.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Install in reverse order of removal.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Installing
do
c
um
en
– Remove the switch panel downward and out from the center
console extension.
Note
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
2.7.7
Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch
Unit, Front Seats, 5-Seater
– Switch unit for rear seat lumbar adjustment (5-seater), remov‐
ing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 74 ;
Removal and Installation.
2. Removal and Installation
265
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.8
Horn
⇒ “2.8.1 High Tone Horn H2 Version 1”, page 266
⇒ “2.8.2 High Tone Horn H2 Version 2”, page 266
2.8.1
High Tone Horn - H2- Version 1
Removing
– Switch off ignition and remove ignition key.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
Note
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
high tone
horn is located in the lower right engine compart‐
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
The
ment next to the engine.
– Separate the connector at the high tone horn -2-.
– Remove the screw and remove the high tone horn from the
bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Note
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
– Remove front noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 50 ; Description and Operation .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
2.8.2
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
Position the high tone horn so that it does not make contact with
surrounding components!
High Tone Horn - H2- Version 2
Removing:
– Turn off the ignition and remove the key.
Note
The high tone horn is located in the front right wheel housing at
the washer fluid reservoir.
– Remove the front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner, Removing and
Installing; Front Wheel Housing Liner .
– Separate the connector -4- at the high tone horn.
266
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the nut -2- or the screw-1- and remove the high tone
horn -3- from the retaining bracket.
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Note
Position the high tone horn so that it does not make contact with
surrounding components!
2.9
Low Tone Horn - H7-
⇒ “2.9.1 Low Tone Horn H7 Version 1”, page 267
⇒ “2.9.2 Low Tone Horn H7 Version 2”, page 267
2.9.1
Low Tone Horn - H7- Version 1
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and remove the key.
Note
n AG. Volkswagen AG
does compartment on
wage
The low tone horn
not
olksis located inside the engine
Vthe
guand windshield
y
the right side
at
bottom,
near
the
heater
core
b
ara
d
nte
ise reservoir.
r
washer fluid
e
ho
t
au
ss
or
ac
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Remove the nut -1- and remove the low tone horn.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Note
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Remove the front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner, Removing and
Installing .
Position the low tone horn so that it does not make contact with
surrounding components!
Low Tone Horn - H7- Version 2
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Turn off the ignition and remove the key.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Note
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Removing
do
c
um
en
2.9.2
The low tone horn is located in the front right wheel housing near
the heater core and the washer fluid reservoir.
2. Removal and Installation
267
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner, Removing and
Installing; Front Wheel Housing Liner .
– Remove the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Windshield and Headlamp Washer Fluid Reservoir
Overview”, page 61 .
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
– Remove the nut -2- or the screw -1- and remove the low tone
horn -4-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
r
fo
ng
AG.
Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
268
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
un
le
Position the low tone horn so that it
surrounding components!
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
by
ara
d
e
nte
s
i
r
does not
make
contact
with
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Note
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
3
Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-
3. Special Tools
269
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
97 –
Wiring
1
General Information
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270
⇒ “1.2 E-Box, in Luggage Compartment on Left Side”,
page 270
⇒ “1.3 Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs”, page 270
1.1
Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing andVoInforma‐
n AG. lkswagen AG do
es n
wage
tion Systems
s
k
l
ot
Vo
y
db
E-Box, in Luggage Compartment on Left
Side
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
Note
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Equipped with E-box and mounting plate starting 06.03. Not in all
versions.
E-box in luggage compartment, left, removing and installing (Ve‐
hicles from 05.2003. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 E-box in Luggage Compartment on Left Side, from
05.2003”, page 276 .
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
1.3
All instructions and information on this chapter can be found in
the repair manual. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General In‐
formation; Rep. Gr. 27 ; General Information .
270
Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
E-box in luggage compartment, left, removing and installing (Ve‐
hicles from 06.2003). Refer to
⇒ “2.6 E-Box in Luggage Compartment, Left Side, from 06.2003”,
page 277
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
1.2
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
e
All instructions and information on
risthis chapter can be found in
tho
the repair manual. Refer to ⇒ auElectrical
Equipment General In‐
ss
formation; Rep. Gr. 27 ; General
Information .
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2
Removal and Installation
⇒ “2.1 Fuse Panel, Under Instrument Panel on Left Side”,
page 271
⇒ “2.2 Auxiliary Fuse Box in Luggage Compartment, Left”,
page 272
⇒ “2.3 Thermal Fuse Box on Driver Side”, page 274
⇒ “2.4 Relay Carrier in Right Front Footwell”, page 275
⇒ “2.5 E-box in Luggage Compartment on Left Side, from
05.2003”, page 276
⇒ “2.6 E-Box in Luggage Compartment, Left Side, from 06.2003”,
page 277
⇒ “2.7 E-box in Plenum Chamber, Right”, page 278
⇒ “2.8 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module”, page 280
⇒ “2.9 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module, Replacing”,
page 281
2.1
Fuse Panel, Under Instrument Panel on
Left Side
The fuse panel is located in the driver footwell under the instru‐
ment panel on the left side.
Note
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
page 15 .
e
wage
Removing
– Remove instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove screws -arrows-.
– Remove the fuse panel. Pay attention to the wires still con‐
nected.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
required
s no
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
ks
Vol
by
d
e
Special tools and
risworkshop equipment
tho
u
a
♦ Torque Wrench
- VAG1783ss
2. Removal and Installation
271
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
s
k
l
o
o
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Auxiliary Fuse Box in Luggage Com‐
partment, Left
un
le
2.2
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
yV
db
ir se
ho
ut
a
ss
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1783Removing
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
r
fo
ng
AG.
Prote
cted
by
– Remove the battery cut-out relay -1-.
– Carefully remove the battery cut-out relay from the holder and
set it aside.
– Remove nut -arrow-.
272
Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Disconnect the connector from the battery cut-out relay
-arrow-.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove battery in left luggage compartment. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Battery in Left Side of Luggage Compartment”,
page 23 .
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
Note
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the luggage compartment on
the left side behind the battery.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove the clip -1- from the lead -2-.
– Carefully pull the auxiliary fuse box with attached leads out to
the side -arrows-.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
– Press the retaining tab -arrow- inward and lift the holder slight‐
ly.
r
fo
ng
AG.
Prote
cted
by
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Installing
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Press the retaining tabs -arrows- inward and remove the hold‐
er with both covers.
2. Removal and Installation
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Press the retaining tabs -arrows- of the auxiliary fuse box out‐
ward and open both covers.
273
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Tighten the auxiliary fuse box nut -arrow- to 6 Nm.
2.3
Thermal Fuse Box on Driver Side
The thermal fuse box is located in the driver footwell, on the ve‐
hicle floor.
Note
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
page 15 .
e
wage
s no
t gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
Removing
– Free up the floor panel in the driver footwell in front of the front
seat.
– Unclip the retaining tabs -arrows- of thermal fuse box cover
and fold the cover aside.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Remove screws -arrows-.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
– Move the fuse panel with the wires still connected to the side.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Note
Carefully pull the wiring harness out of the side guide.
If the housing of thermal fuse box is also being removed, proceed
as follows:
274
Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
do
c
um
en
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
required
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
olks
yV
db
e
Special tools and workshop
equipment
ris
ho
ut
a
♦ Torque Wrenchss - VAG1783-
– Remove screws
Installing
Equipment
AG. Volkswagen Electrical
AG do
agen
es n
ksw
l
o
o
t
gu
yV
ara
db
-arrows-.
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Tighten the screws -arrows- to 2 Nm.
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Tighten the screws -arrows- to 1.5 Nm.
AG.
Prote
cted
by
2.4
Phaeton 2003 ➤
- Edition 03.2016
Relay Carrier in Right Front Footwell
The relay carrier is located under a cover in the right front footwell.
Note
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1783Removing
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Clear the vehicle floor in the front right footwell, under the in‐
strument panel.
2. Removal and Installation
275
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove screws -arrows-.
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
– Pull out the relay carrier with attached wiring harness.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
Removing
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Unclip the wiring harness -1- and ground (GND) cable -2above the E-box -3- out of the brackets -arrows-.
276
Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring
AG.
E-box in Luggage Compartment on Left
Side, from 05.2003
agen
lksw
Vo
by
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
2.5
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
– Tighten the screws -arrows- to 1.5 Nm.
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
– Remove screws -arrows-.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
h
ut
ra
a
c
s
s
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
– Remove the trim panel from the housing.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Press the retaining tab -arrow- of the E-box to the left.
– Press the retaining tab -arrow- of the E-box to the right.
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
d
a
oes
ksw
n
– Press the E-box up
from
Volto the stop and remove E-boxotupward
gu
by
ara
mounting plate.
d
e
n
tee
or
ac
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
– Lay E-box to side, taking attached wiring harnesses into con‐
sideration.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
E-Box in Luggage Compartment, Left
Side, from 06.2003
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Removing
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
2.6
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ris
ho
ut
a
ss
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Unclip wiring harness -1- and ground (GND) cable above Ebox -3- out of brackets -arrows-.
– Also press bolting device -2- downward on back side of brack‐
et.
2. Removal and Installation
277
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Press tabs on carrier plate -arrows- toward rear and slide EBox -1- up to the stop.
– Remove E-Box from carrier plate and lay aside, taking attach‐
ed wiring harnesses into consideration.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
E-box in Plenum Chamber, Right
Note
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1783-
Removing
do
c
um
en
– Disconnect battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
– Remove the control module for distance regulation. Refer to
⇒ “4.19 Brake Booster Control Module”, page 42 .
agen
lksw
Vo
by
– Unclip the retaining tabs -arrows- of the E-box cover and pull
the cover out toward the front.
Prote
cted
by
Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring
AG.
278
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
2.7
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
– Remove screws -arrows-.
– Lift the relay and fuse panel of the E-box and pull it out toward
the front.
If the E-box housing is also being removed, proceed as follows:
– Remove instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 ; Removal and Installation .
– Remove screws -arrows-.
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
wage
s
k
l
ot g
o
yV
ua
b
d
ran
ir se
tee
o
h
t
or
u
ac
a
ss
– Remove screws -arrows-.
Installing
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
– Pull the E-box housing out toward the inside.
Install in reverse order of removal, note the following:
– Tighten the screws -arrows- to 2 Nm.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
do
c
um
en
Note
2. Removal and Installation
279
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.8
Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐ Volkswa
gen AG
AG.
does
agen
ule
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
un
le
Note
y
db
ise
r
tho
au
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
a
t
i
h re
o
n in
wit
thi
s
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot
com
pe
rm
itte
d
When disconnecting and connecting the battery, always perform
the work procedure as described in the repair manual. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1783Removing
– Disconnect the battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
– Clear the vehicle floor in the front right footwell, under the in‐
strument panel.
– Remove the housing trim panel -1-.
Prote
cted
by
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Tighten the screws -2- to 1.5 Nm.
Note
Always follow the instructions regarding disconnecting and con‐
necting the battery. Refer to
⇒ “4.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting Sequence”,
page 15 .
280
Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring
AG.
– Disconnect the connector from the vehicle electrical system
control module.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
– Remove the vehicle electrical system control module from the
bracket with the wires still connected.
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
– Press retaining tabs -arrows- outward.
do
c
um
en
r
te o
iva
r
rp
fo
g
n
– Remove mounting bolts -2-.
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
2.9
Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐
ule, Replacing
DTC Recognition and Display
Special tools and workshop equipment required
olkswagen
♦ Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information
- AG
AG. VSystem
does
agen
VAS5051Bksw
not
l
o
V
y
db
♦ Diagnostic Cable - VAS5051/6Aise
or
h
ut
un
le
– Using the go to button, select functions/component selection
and the following menu options in sequence:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical equipment
♦ 01 - On Board Diagnostic (OBD) capable systems
♦ Vehicle electrical system control module
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
r
fo
ng
♦ Functions
rrectne
s
s
o
f
i
t to the co
n
form
spec
atio
h re
n
wit
i
n
thi
sd
o
c
um
en
urposes, in part or in wh
ole,
cial p
is n
mer
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
v
i
r
d
p
– Select guided fault finding in -VAS5051B- .
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
-VAS5051B- , connecting.
ss Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information Systems”,
page 270
gu
ara
nte
eo
ra
c
2. Removal and Installation
281
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
3
Special Tools
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Special tools and workshop equipment required
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
♦ Torque Wrench - VAG1783-
♦ Vehicle Diagnosis, Testing and Information System VAS5051B-
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
282
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
♦ Diagnostic Cable - VAS5051/6A-
Phaeton 2003 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 03.2016
4
Revision History
DRUCK NUMBER: K0658950821
Job Fe Notes
Type ed‐
ba
ck
RG 94 5.3–5.4 title change Joe Y
only, 5.5 new
Feedback numbers attach‐ Tom P
ed, but do not show up as
North American feedback
numbers.
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
V
gu
y
b
ara
d
nte
ise
r
o
eo
h
t
u
ra
a
c
s
s
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
Fe
ed‐
ba
ck:
74
76
71,
50
51
00,
50
75
27
do
c
um
en
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t.
C
op
yi
04/2 Fac‐
8/20 tory
16
Up‐
date
02/2 Fac‐
4/20 tory
14
Up‐
date
Quality
Checke
d By
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
Fac‐ Edit
tory Edi‐
Edi‐ tion
tion
4. Revision History
283
Cautions & Warnings
Please read these WARNINGS and CAUTIONS before proceeding with maintenance
and repair work. You must answer that you have read and you understand these
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS before you will be allowed to view this information.
•=
If you lack the skills, tools and equipment, or a suitable workshop for any procedure described in this manual, we
suggest you leave such repairs to an authorized Volkswagen retailer or other qualified shop. We especially urge
you to consult an authorized Volkswagen retailer before beginning repairs on any vehicle that may still be covered
wholly or in part by any of the extensive warranties issued by Volkswagen.
•=
Disconnect the battery negative terminal (ground strap) whenever you work on the fuel system or the electrical
system. Do not smoke or work near heaters or other fire hazards. Keep an approved fire extinguisher handy.
•=
Volkswagen is constantly improving its vehicles and sometimes these changes, both in parts and specifications,
are made applicable to earlier models. Therefore, part numbers listed in this manual are for reference only. Always
check with your authorized Volkswagen retailer parts department for the latest information.
•=
Any time the battery has been disconnected on an automatic transmission vehicle, it will be necessary to
reestablish Transmission Control Module (TCM) basic settings using the VAG 1551 Scan Tool (ST).
•=
Never work under a lifted vehicle unless it is solidly supported on stands designed for the purpose. Do not support
a vehicle on cinder blocks, hollow tiles or other props that may crumble under continuous load. Never work under a
vehicle that is supported solely by a jack. Never work under the vehicle while the engine is running.
•=
oes
wa radio activation code
For vehicles equipped with an anti-theft radio, be sure of theVcorrect
disconnecting the
nbefore
ot g
olks
y
ua may lock up and
b
d when the power is restored, the radio
battery or removing the radio. If the wrong code is entered
r
a
e
nte
ris
eo
become inoperable, even if the correct code is usedutin
ho a later attempt.
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG
d
ra
c
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
a
ss
If you are going to work under a vehicle on the ground, make sure that the ground is level. Block the wheels to
keep the vehicle from rolling. Disconnect the battery negative terminal (ground strap) to prevent others from
starting the vehicle while you are under it.
•=
Do not attempt to work on your vehicle if you do not feel well. You increase the danger of injury to yourself and
others if you are tired, upset or have taken medicine or any other substances that may impair you or keep you from
being fully alert.
•=
Never run the engine unless the work area is well ventilated. Carbon monoxide (CO) kills.
•=
Always observe good workshop practices. Wear goggles when you operate machine tools or work with acid. Wear
goggles, gloves and other protective clothing whenever the job requires working with harmful substances.
•=
Tie long hair behind your head. Do not wear a necktie, a scarf, loose clothing, or a necklace when you work near
machine tools or running engines. If your hair, clothing, or jewelry were to get caught in the machinery, severe
injury could result.
•=
Do not re-use any fasteners that are worn or deformed in normal use. Some fasteners are designed to be used
only once and are unreliable and may fail if used a second time. This includes, but is not limited to, nuts, bolts,
washers, circlips and cotter pins. Always follow the recommendations in this manual - replace these fasteners with
new parts where indicated, and any other time it is deemed necessary by inspection.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
•=
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
h
t
.
Co
py
i
Page 1 of 3
© 2002 Volkswagen of America, Inc.
All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is based on the latest information available at the time of printing and is subject to the copyright and other intellectual property rights of
Volkswagen of America, Inc., its affiliated companies and its licensors. All rights are reserved to make changes at any time without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, nor may these materials be modified or reposted to other sites, without
the prior expressed written permission of the publisher.
Version 1.0
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
oes
ksw
not
l
o
gu
yV
b
ara
d
e
nte
is
r
o
eo
th
u
ra
a
c
s
s
Cautions & Warnings
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
m
ot p
o
c
erm
or
e
t
a
itte
iv
r
du
rp
o
nl
f
e
ng
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
Illuminate the work area adequately but safely. Use a portable safety light for working inside or under the vehicle.
Make sure the bulb is enclosed by a wire cage. The hot filament of an accidentally broken bulb can ignite spilled
fuel or oil.
•=
Friction materials such as brake pads and clutch discs may contain asbestos fibers. Do not create dust by
grinding, sanding, or by cleaning with compressed air. Avoid breathing asbestos fibers and asbestos dust.
Breathing asbestos can cause serious diseases such as asbestosis or cancer, and may result in death.
•=
Finger rings should be removed so that they cannot cause electrical shorts, get caught in running machinery, or be
crushed by heavy parts.
•=
Before starting a job, make certain that you have all the necessary tools and parts on hand. Read all the
instructions thoroughly; do not attempt shortcuts. Use tools that are appropriate to the work and use only
replacement parts meeting Volkswagen specifications. Makeshift tools, parts and procedures will not make good
repairs.
•=
Catch draining fuel, oil or brake fluid in suitable containers. Do not use empty food or beverage containers that
might mislead someone into drinking from them. Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Wipe up spills at
once, but do not store the oily rags, which can ignite and burn spontaneously.
•=
Use pneumatic and electric tools only to loosen threaded parts and fasteners. Never use these tools to tighten
fasteners, especially on light alloy parts. Always use a torque wrench to tighten fasteners to the tightening torque
listed.
•=
Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from the top of the battery. If escaping hydrogen gas is
ignited, it will ignite gas trapped in the cells and cause the battery to explode.
•=
Be mindful of the environment and ecology. Before you drain the crankcase, find out the proper way to dispose of
the oil. Do not pour oil onto the ground, down a drain, or into a stream, pond, or lake. Consult local ordinances that
govern the disposal of wastes.
•=
The air-conditioning (A/C) system is filled with a chemical refrigerant that is hazardous. The A/C system should be
serviced only by trained automotive service technicians using approved refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment,
trained in related safety precautions, and familiar with regulations governing the discharging and disposal of
automotive chemical refrigerants.
•=
Before doing any electrical welding on vehicles equipped with anti-lock brakes (ABS), disconnect the battery
negative terminal (ground strap) and the ABS control module connector.
•=
Do not expose any part of the A/C system to high temperatures such as open flame. Excessive heat will increase
system pressure and may cause the system to burst.
•=
When boost-charging the battery, first remove the fuses for the Engine Control Module (ECM), the Transmission
Control Module (TCM), the ABS control module, and the trip computer. In cases where one or more of these
components is not separately fused, disconnect the control module connector(s).
•=
Some of the vehicles covered by this manual are equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS), that
automatically deploys an airbag in the event of a frontal impact. The airbag is operated by an explosive device.
Handled improperly or without adequate safeguards, it can be accidentally activated and cause serious personal
injury. To guard against personal injury or airbag system failure, only trained Volkswagen Service technicians
should test, disassemble or service the airbag system.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nf
o
r
m
spec
atio
h re
n in
wit
•=
thi
sd
o
cu
m
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
py
rig
ht
.
C
op
yi
Page 2 of 3
© 2002 Volkswagen of America, Inc.
All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is based on the latest information available at the time of printing and is subject to the copyright and other intellectual property rights of
Volkswagen of America, Inc., its affiliated companies and its licensors. All rights are reserved to make changes at any time without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, nor may these materials be modified or reposted to other sites, without
the prior expressed written permission of the publisher.
Version 1.0
Cautions & Warnings
•=
Do not quick-charge the battery (for boost starting) for longer than one minute, and do not exceed 16.5 volts at the
battery with the boosting cables attached. Wait at least one minute before boosting the battery a second time.
•=
Never use a test light to conduct electrical tests of the airbag system. The system must only be tested by trained
Volkswagen Service technicians using the VAG 1551 Scan Tool (ST) or an approved equivalent. The airbag unit
must never be electrically tested while it is not installed in the vehicle.
•=
Some aerosol tire inflators are highly flammable. Be extremely
cautious
when
. Volkswage
n AG drepairing a tire that may have been
gen AG
oeof
waflame
s noignition away from the tire repair
s
inflated using an aerosol tire inflator. Keep sparks, open
or
other
sources
k
l
o
tg
yV
b
ara Completely remove the
area. Inflate and deflate the tire at least four times
before
breaking
the
bead
from
theurim.
d
nte
ir se
eo
tire from the rim before attempting any repair.
tho
au
ss
ra
c
ility
ab
y li
an
pt
ce
es, in part or in w
l purpos
hole
ercia
, is n
m
ot p
om
c
r
erm
o
e
t
a
itte
riv
du
p
or
nl
f
e
g
n
•= When driving or riding in an airbag-equipped vehicle, never hold test equipment in your hands or lap while the
vehicle is in motion. Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accident.
rrectness of i
t to the co
nform
spec
at
i
h re
o
n
wit
in t
his
I have read and I understand these Cautions and Warnings.
do
c
um
en
ht
rig
py
Co
t.
agen
lksw
Vo
by
AG.
Prote
cted
by
c
o
p
yri
gh
t
.
C
op
yi
Page 3 of 3
© 2002 Volkswagen of America, Inc.
All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is based on the latest information available at the time of printing and is subject to the copyright and other intellectual property rights of
Volkswagen of America, Inc., its affiliated companies and its licensors. All rights are reserved to make changes at any time without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, nor may these materials be modified or reposted to other sites, without
the prior expressed written permission of the publisher.
Version 1.0